JP2020000419A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance a performance effect after a special game and to enhance game amusement.SOLUTION: A prescribed period after a jackpot game is performance mode C which corresponds to both a low-probability high-base state and a high-probability high-base state. By passage of the prescribed period, the performance mode C can be switched to performance mode D corresponding to a low-probability high-base state or performance mode E corresponding to the high-probability high-base state. By doing so, performance modes change before and after the prescribed period passes after the jackpot game, and a performance content changes accordingly. By shifting the performance mode C to the performance mode D or E, a real game is shown to a player. Thus, it is possible to attract a player's interest to the performance content (switching of performance modes) after the jackpot game and to enhance game amusement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  Conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can execute a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, in order to increase the player's expectation of the continuous occurrence of special games (so-called “repeated chan”), an effect started with the execution of the special game is performed by changing the identification information after the end of the special game. There is one configured to continue as an effect accompanying display (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-29587 A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the same effect is continuously executed from the start of the special game to the game in which the identification information is changed and displayed after the special game, so that the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may easily get bored.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the effect of a special game and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the present invention has adopted the following configurations.
That is, the gaming machine of the means 1 is
A gaming machine which is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
With the effect mode control means which can be controlled to any of a plurality of effect modes with different effect contents,
The plurality of effect modes include at least a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect mode,
The effect mode control means can set the effect mode in the first effect mode for a predetermined period from the end of the special game, and changes the effect mode from the first effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period. The gist is that the mode can be switched to the second effect mode or the third effect mode.

  The gaming machine of the means 1 includes an effect mode control means that can be controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes having different effect contents, and the plurality of effect modes include at least a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect. Mode exists. And the production mode control means can set the production mode in the predetermined period from the end of the special game to the first production mode, and after the predetermined period elapses, changes the production mode from the first production mode to the second production mode. Mode or the third effect mode. Therefore, after the special game, the effect mode changes before and after the predetermined period elapses, and the effect content changes accordingly. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game. The “predetermined period” after the special game can be a predetermined period or a period selected from a plurality of predetermined periods.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The effect mode control means may switch the effect mode from the second effect mode to the third effect mode after switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after the elapse of the predetermined period. The gist is that there is.

  In the gaming machine of the means 2, the effect mode control means switches the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a lapse of a predetermined period after the special game, and then switches the effect mode from the second effect mode to the third effect. There are cases where the mode is switched. Therefore, if the effect mode is switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game, there is a possibility that the effect mode will be further switched to the third effect mode. Thereby, it is possible to further attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 described above,
Game state control means that can control the game state after the special game,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The effect mode control means,
When the game state after the special game is the first game state, the effect mode cannot be switched to the third effect mode,
When the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode or the third effect mode after the lapse of the predetermined period, and The gist is that the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode at a predetermined time after the switch to the second effect mode.

  The gaming machine of the means 3 is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling a game state after the special game, and the game state after the special game includes at least a first game state and a game state more than the first game state. There is a second game state that is advantageous to the player. When the game state after the special game is the first game state, it is impossible to switch the effect mode to the third effect mode, and the game state after the special game is the second game state. In this case, it is possible to switch the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode or the third effect mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and to switch the effect mode after switching to the second effect mode. At a predetermined time, the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. For this reason, the first effect mode in the predetermined period after the special game is an effect mode in which the game state after the special game is not the first game state or the second game state (it is unknown), The second effect mode is an effect mode indicating that the game state after the special game is the first game state, and the third effect mode is an effect mode indicating that the game state after the special game is the second game state. Become. In addition, the second effect mode can be executed even when the game state after the special game is the second game state, and therefore, the predetermined time after switching (transition) from the first effect mode to the second effect mode Until (the time of switching to the third effect mode) has passed, it can be said that the effect mode is an effect mode that internally indicates the possibility of the second game state. As a result, it is possible to further attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine of the means 3 described above,
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition up to a predetermined upper limit number,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means is configured so that, after the special game, the gaming state is the second gaming state, and at the elapse of the predetermined period, at least a predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information is stored in order from the earliest stored one. When the predetermined time period has passed, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, and after the switch, identification information based on the predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information can be obtained. The gist is that the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode before the change display ends.

  In the gaming machine of the means 4, it is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the obtained information obtained when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The variable display of the identification information is performed based on the obtained information, and the obtained information includes at least the specific obtained information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the display result of the variable display is specified. Non-specific acquisition information that is not a display result exists. Then, the game state after the special game is the second game state, and at the elapse of a predetermined period after the special game, at least a predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information is stored in order from the first stored one. In this case, it is possible to switch the production mode from the first production mode to the second production mode after the lapse of the predetermined period, and after the switching to the second production mode, the above-mentioned predetermined number of non-specific acquisitions are performed. The effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode by the time the change display of the identification information based on the information ends. For this reason, when the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state, and the effect mode is switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a predetermined period after the special game, the third effect mode thereafter Since the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result before switching to the special game, the switching to the third effect mode (transition) can be executed without fail. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the game state after the special game is the first game state and that the effect is actually provided by indicating later that the game state is the second game state.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is different from the gaming machine of the means 3 or 4 described above in that
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means, when the game state after the special game is the second game state, and at least the specific acquisition information is stored at the elapse of the predetermined period, the effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period Can be switched from the first effect mode to the third effect mode.

  In the gaming machine of the means 5, it is possible to store the obtained information obtained when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The variable display of the identification information is performed based on the obtained information, and the obtained information includes at least the specific obtained information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the display result of the variable display is specified. Non-specific acquisition information that is not a display result exists. Then, when the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state and at least the specific acquisition information is stored at the elapse of the predetermined period after the special game, the effect mode is changed to the second at the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to switch from the first production mode to the third production mode. Therefore, by switching (shifting) from the first effect mode to the third effect mode, the player is made aware that the game state after the special game is the second game state, and then the identification based on the specific acquisition information. It is possible to display the information in a fluctuating manner and to execute a special game. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect of switching the effect mode after the special game.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 5 described above,
It is possible to perform a notice effect on the fluctuation display of identification information,
In the first effect mode, the gist is that the possibility of executing the notice effect is lower than in the second effect mode and the third effect mode.

  In the gaming machine of the means 6, it is possible to execute a notice effect regarding the variable display of the identification information. In the first effect mode, the notice effect is performed as compared with the second effect mode and the third effect mode. The likelihood is low. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate between the first effect mode until the predetermined period elapses after the special game and the second effect mode or the third effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. As a result, it is possible to make the effects after the special game rich. In addition, "the possibility of execution of the notice effect is low" may include a case where the possibility of execution is zero.

  According to the above-described present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect after the special game, and to improve the entertainment of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board concerning the example of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3 and is a view showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table | surface which shows the correspondence of the type of a big hit, the opening pattern of a big winning opening, etc. It is a table | surface which shows various random numbers which a microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main interruption process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a general-purpose operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. 7 is a flowchart of a special figure 2 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol change processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a reservation notice setting process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a flowchart of a right strike instruction image display process. It is a flowchart of a big hit end effect mode setting process. It is a flowchart of an effect mode shift process. It is a flowchart of a comment notice setting process. (A) is Toku-zu 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table A, (b) is Toku-zu 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table B, and (c) is Toku-zu 1 reservation notice effect pattern determination table C. . (A) is the special figure 2 suspension notice effect pattern determination table A, (b) is the special figure 2 suspension notice effect pattern determination table B, and (c) is the special figure 2 suspension notice effect pattern determination table C. , (D) is a special figure 2 reservation announcement effect pattern determination table D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the normal display mode of a 1st production suspension, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 suspension announcement production based on the pattern A1 of the special figure 1 suspension announcement type A, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 reserved advance announcement effect based on the pattern B1 of the special figure 1 reserved advance notice type B, and (d) is a special figure 1 reserved based on the pattern C5 of the special figure 1 reserved advance notice type C It is a figure showing an example of a notice effect. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the normal display mode of 2nd production suspension, (b) is a figure which shows an example of special figure 2 suspension announcement production based on pattern A1 of special figure 2 suspension announcement type A, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement effect based on the pattern B1 of the special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement type B, and (d) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 reservation based on the pattern C5 of the special illustration 2 suspension preliminary announcement type C It is a figure showing an example of a notice effect, and (e) is a figure showing an example of a special figure 2 reservation notice effect based on pattern D4 of special figure 2 reservation notice type D. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a round effect in a special game state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a fluctuation display of effect symbols in a high base state, and (c). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a transition is made from a high base state to a low base state. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode C, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of effect mode D, and (c) is an example of a display screen of effect mode D FIG. (A) is a reach effect pattern determination table A for the low base state, and (b) is a reach effect pattern determination table B for the high base state. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of reach A-C (normal reach production), and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of SP reach A-C (super reach production). (A) is an explanatory view showing a non-operating state (standby position) of the first movable decorative member and the second movable decorative member, and (b) is a movable accessory notice pattern determination table. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state (operation state of a 1st movable decoration member) at the time of performing a 1st movable accessory notice, and (b) is a state at the time of performing a 2nd movable accessory notice ( It is explanatory drawing which shows the (operating state of a 2nd movable decoration member). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a comment preview display screen, (b1) is a comment preview pattern determination table, (b2) is a comment display pattern determination table A for a low base state, (b3) Is a comment display pattern determination table B for the high base state. It is a flow chart of the effect mode setting process at the time of big hit end of the second embodiment.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) in which a game medium used in a game is a game ball, and the game can be advanced by firing the game ball toward a game board. An example will be described. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the following example performs a fluctuation display of a special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. And a so-called "one-type" pachinko gaming machine that can execute a jackpot game (special game) in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to a player.

  Further, in the following description, simply the front side (front) refers to the front side (the side where the player is located at the time of the game) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and simply the rear side (rear) refers to the game. This is the back side (back side) when the machine is viewed from the front. In addition, simply upper (upper), lower (lower), left (left), and right (right) are upper, lower, left, and right directions when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. For example, it refers to the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (Embodiment 1) includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. The board 2 is configured to be detachable from the gaming machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 on which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall island facility. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and can be opened and closed, respectively. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates (when a player plays a game), the front frame 51 is in a closed state, and the front frame 51 has a surface of the game board 2 attached to the main body frame 52 (game board surface). Is provided with a window (viewing window) that allows the player to view the game from the outside, so that the player can see the game board surface through the window (viewing window).

  The game board 2 and the front frame 51 are provided with various parts (game parts, game machine component parts) that can be seen and touched by a player when executing a game. Specifically, the front frame 51 has a firing handle 60 for firing game balls at a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and stores the game balls on the launch device side. A hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 that can be supplied and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect executed as the game progresses (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as the two effect buttons). Simply called “effect button 63”), a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights according to the game situation, and emits various sounds (sound effects) according to the game situation. A speaker 67 and the like that can perform the operations are also provided.

  The effect button 63 functions as an input unit that can be input by the player, and the effect button to be used can be properly used according to the type of the game effect. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during execution of a game effect, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. In the present embodiment, the first effect button 63a is provided on the near side of the center of the upper surface (top surface) of the upper plate 61, and the second effect button 63b is provided on the lower left front side of the front frame 51. These will be used properly according to the situation. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment, but may be any as long as the player can make an input. For example, the input means ( For example, a retractable type, a touch sensor type, or the like, or a non-contact type input means (a photoelectric type, for example) that detects that a part of the body of the player has approached and performs an input. Good. The effect button may perform an effect operation such as projecting upward or forward or vibrating (movable effect operation means).

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball fired by operating the firing handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls protrude from the game area 3, and a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return preventing piece 6 is for preventing a game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) capable of emitting various lights according to the state of the game.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 (effect display device) composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an "effect symbol display section") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols 8") are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a variable display in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol described later. As a mode of the variable display, for example, there is a mode of scrolling display in up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, and the like. The effect symbol display area 7b includes, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right", a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and a medium effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .

  The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (identification information) of the present embodiment are respectively composed of numeric symbols (identification information type, symbol type) from "1" to "9", and these numeric symbols are sequentially displayed. It has become something. Specifically, the variable display of the effect design 8 is such that the effect design is scrolled vertically (in this example, from top to bottom) in the order of “1” → “2”... “8” → “9” (ascending order). The display is performed by displaying (also referred to as “vertical scroll”). When the display reaches “9”, the display returns to “1”, and the scroll display is repeated until the change ends (stop display). In the present embodiment, color information is included in each of the symbols “1” to “9”, and each symbol can be classified by color. Specifically, the odd symbols “3” and “7” are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbols”), and the other odd symbols “1”, “5”, “9” Is a green symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a “green symbol”). Further, the even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “blue symbols”).

  Displayed on a first special symbol display 41a (hereinafter, also referred to as a "first special symbol display section") according to a combination (stop display mode) of left, middle, and right effect symbols stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b. Of the first special symbol displayed, or the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as a "second special symbol display section"), that is, the special symbol The result of the success / failure determination (simply referred to as “victory / failure determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize the result. In the present embodiment, the order in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (stop order) is, in principle, “left → right → center”. That is, the first stop symbol in the stop order is the left effect symbol 8L, the second stop symbol in the stop order is the right effect symbol 8R, and the third (last) stop symbol in the stop order is the middle effect symbol 8C. . The first stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "second stop symbol", and the third stop symbol in the stop order. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  In addition, any one of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol is also referred to simply as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the ordinary symbol is "Public figure" or "ordinary identification information", the special symbol is "Special figure", and the first special symbol is "Special figure 1", "First special figure", or "Second figure". The special design is also referred to as "special figure 2" or "second special figure". In addition, the image display device 7 for displaying the effect symbol 8, the first special symbol indicator 41a for displaying the first special symbol, and the second special symbol indicator 41b for displaying the second special symbol are referred to as "identification information". Also referred to as "display means."

  For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three digits (specific mode, specific display result) such as "222" and "777" It is. When the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, at least one symbol out of three symbols such as “637” or “373” is rendered in a different pattern (non-specific mode, non-specific display result). The symbols can be stopped and displayed. Thus, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol correctness determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but produces an effect. It is understood by looking at the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In the present embodiment, the type (type) of the big hit will be described later through the display mode (specific mode, specific display result) of the effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit. There are cases where it is possible to grasp whether a "probable variable big hit" or "non-probable variable big hit" occurs or not. Details on this point will be described later.

  Here, among the stop display modes (symbol combinations) of the effect symbols 8, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (in the present embodiment, the slotted eyes) is referred to as “big hit mode”, “ The specific display state or the specific display result may be referred to as a stop display mode (in this embodiment, a non-specific mode) corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol right / wrong determination is incorrect. "Or" non-specific display result ". In addition, since the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 can be said to indicate the result of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 may be referred to as a “result display mode”.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect design game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, a jackpot game effect (special game effect) executed along with the jackpot game, And other game effects such as a demonstration effect for waiting for customers. In the effect design game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to the effect design such as a numeral, an effect image other than the effect design such as a background image or a character image is displayed. The effect design game effect is also referred to as “fluctuation effect”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit) for displaying the first effect suspension 9a according to the number of first special figure suspensions described later. And a second effect holding display area 9d (second effect holding display unit) for displaying the second effect holding 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure holdings described later (see FIG. 3). The number of stored first special figure reservations and the second special figure reservation display 43b displayed on a first special figure reservation display 43a, which will be described later, according to the display mode (display number) of the first production suspension and the second production suspension. The number of stored second special figure reservations displayed by can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 of the present embodiment displays on the effect hold corresponding to the currently changing special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), that is, the held special figure hold. A variable hold display area 9e for displaying the corresponding effect hold (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b) is provided (see FIG. 3). With the start of the change display of the special symbol, the effect hold (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b) corresponding to the change display is displayed in the change hold display area 9e. It moves from the area (the first effect hold display area 9c or the second effect hold display area 9d). After the movement, the effect hold is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e until a predetermined display end condition is satisfied. Is done. In the present embodiment, a super-reach effect described later is started on the display screen 7a, or the variable display ends without performing a reach effect described later (without reaching reach) on the display screen 7a, and the departure effect is performed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect suspension displayed (moved) in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is deleted. It should be noted that the display termination condition of the production suspension in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is not limited to the one shown in the present embodiment, but can be arbitrarily determined.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a left-handed display area 70c (left-handed instruction image display unit) for displaying a left-handed instruction image 70, which will be described later, and a right-handed instruction, which will be described later, according to the game state. A right-handed display area 71c (right-handed instruction image display unit) for displaying the image 71 is provided (see FIG. 52). Note that the left-turn instruction image 70 and the right-turn instruction image 71 are also collectively referred to as a “launch instruction image”.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decorative body 10 surrounding the display screen 7a (effect design display area 7b) is provided. The center decorative body 10 is formed of a molded product made of plastic (resin), and is attached to the surface (front surface) of the game board 2 as a frame-shaped part (panel part) having an open center. . The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes visible through the center opening of the center decorative body 10.

  A stage 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided at a lower portion of the center decoration 10, and a hollow warp 12 is provided at a left portion of the center decoration 10. Has been. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 (the left game area 3A) from the warp entrance and discharges them from the warp exit, so that the game balls can be staged. Guide to unit 11. The game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first starting port 20 described later with a higher possibility than game balls not guided to the stage unit 11.

  Further, a first movable decorative member 13 operable in accordance with a game effect is provided on the upper part of the center decorative body 10 so as to be always visible to a player. The first movable decorative member 13 of the present embodiment is mainly configured by one circular movable body (movable member) having irregularities formed on the outer periphery. Is located at a standby position on the upper left side (upper left) of the image display device 7 so as not to cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, when the execution condition of the movable effect for operating the first movable decorative member 13 (also referred to as “first movable effect”) is satisfied, the first movable decorative member 13 starts operating and moves from the standby position to a predetermined position. Move toward the operating position.

  In the present embodiment, the execution of the first movable effect causes the first movable decorative member 13 to move diagonally downward and to the right and stop at a position (operating position) covering the upper central portion of the display screen 7a. I have. When the first movable decorative member 13 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the first movable decorative member 13 is located on the near side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. (In this example, a part of the area where the medium effect design 8C is displayed). In addition, the first movable decorative member 13 (movable body) is provided with an electric decoration composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the electric decoration emits light when the first movable effect is performed. Furthermore, the first movable decorative member 13 rotates clockwise in a direction parallel to the display screen 7a while being moved to the operating position (on the front side of the display screen 7a) (FIG. 57A). See). In the present embodiment, it is possible to perform such a first movable effect as a notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 8 or as a part of the reach effect. For this reason, the player increases the expectation for the big hit by executing the first movable effect. Note that, with the end of the first movable effect, the first movable decorative member 13 performs an operation of returning to the original standby position.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a second movable decorative member 14 operable in accordance with the game effect is provided behind (on the back side of) the center decorative body 10. The second movable decorative member 14 is normally (when not in operation) hidden by a frame (frame) that constitutes the center decorative body 10, so that the entire movable decorative member 14 cannot be visually recognized. The second movable decorative member 14 of the present embodiment is mainly composed of three plate-shaped (plate-shaped) movable bodies (movable members) 14a, 14b, and 14c, and these three movable bodies 14a to 14c are provided. Normally (when not operating), it is located on the outer peripheral side so as not to cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIG. 56 (a)). Specifically, the second movable decorative member 14 (movable bodies 14a to 14c) is provided in a space formed between the game board 2 and the image display device 7 disposed behind (on the back side of) the game board 2. Normally (when not operating), as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the movable body 14a is located above the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the movable body 14a is located at the lower right of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). 14b, the movable body 14c is located (standby) at the lower left of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). In FIG. 56 (a), the movable bodies 14a, 14b, 14c at the standby position (not visible) are indicated by dotted lines.

  On the other hand, when the execution condition of the movable effect for operating the second movable decorative member 14 (also referred to as “second movable effect”) is satisfied, the second movable decorative member 14 starts operating and the three movable members 14 a , 14b, and 14c move from the standby position toward a predetermined operation position. In the present embodiment, the execution of the second movable effect causes the movable bodies 14a, 14b, and 14c to move toward the center of the display screen 7a at the same time, and all become close to the front side of the screen ( (Operation position). When the movable bodies 14a, 14b, and 14c move from the standby position to the operating position, the movable bodies (the second movable decorative members 14) are united on the near side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 57B). (Integrated) to cover most (substantially the entire area) of the display screen 7a. The surface (front side) of the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable bodies 14a to 14c) is subjected to a shaping process representing one motif (shape, pattern, etc., in this example, a predetermined character). The movable bodies 14a, 14b, and 14c appear on the near side of the display screen 7a and move to the operation position, and when they come close to each other, the motif is completed (FIG. 57B). See). In the present embodiment, it is possible to perform such a second movable effect as a notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 8 or as a part of the reach effect. For this reason, the player increases the sense of expectation for the big hit by executing the second movable effect. With the end of the second movable effect, the second movable decorative member 14 (movable bodies 14a to 14c) moves (returns) to the original standby position all at once.

  Here, the effect holding display areas 9c and 9d capable of displaying the effect holdings 9a and 9b corresponding to the special figure holding are also referred to as "effect holding display means", and various effect images according to the game situation are displayed. The image display device 7 capable of performing a display effect by displaying is also referred to as “display effect means”. In addition, the first movable decorative member 13 capable of performing the first movable effect by operating in conjunction with the game effect is also referred to as a “first movable role” or “first movable effect means”. The second movable decorative member 14 (the movable bodies 14a to 14c) capable of performing the second movable effect by operating in conjunction with is also referred to as "second movable role" or "second movable effect means". . In addition, the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member 14 are also generally referred to as “movable accessory” or “movable decorative member”, and the first movable effect means and the second movable effect means are generally referred to as “movable decorative member”. This is also referred to as "movable staging means." In addition, in addition to the movable decorative member 14, for example, when the effect button 63 moves up and down, vibrates, and the like in accordance with the game effect, the effect button 63 can also be referred to as “movable effect means”. Further, the speaker 67 capable of producing a sound effect by emitting various sounds (effect sounds) according to the game situation is also referred to as “sound production means”, and various lights are emitted according to the game situation. The board surface lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 (lighting member) capable of performing a light effect by emitting light are also referred to as “light effect means”. In addition to the board lamp 5 and the like, for example, the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 incorporate an electric decoration member such as an LED similarly to the decoration member 13, and the operation of the electric decoration member causes the game situation to be changed. In the case of lighting or blinking according to the above, the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 can also be said to be "light effect means". In addition, these "effect presentation display means", "display effect means", "first movable effect means", "second movable effect means", "sound effect means", and "light effect means" are collectively referred to as "effect means". Say.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change. Based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for a special symbol hit determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a hit / non-hit determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail Determination) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of the correctness.

  Below the first starting port 20, there is provided a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port") including a variable second starting port 21 in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second opening 21, a random number for determining a special symbol hit / fail is acquired, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the hit / non-hit determination of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / non-judgment) ) Is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination.

  It should be noted that the special symbol change display and the effect symbol change display performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination being "big hit" are also referred to as "big hit change" or "specific change". The fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol performed based on the result of "out" are also referred to as "out fluctuation" or "non-specific fluctuation".

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. That is, the movable member 23 performs a predetermined operation (opening / closing operation) to change the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting port 21. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. . The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It is not necessary that the ball cannot be entered.

  On the right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, there is provided a special winning device 31 having a special winning opening 30 (also referred to as a "variable receiving opening"). The special winning device 31 includes an opening and closing member 32, and opens and closes the special winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening and closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The game winning ball can enter the large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32, the special winning opening 30 (the special winning device 31) is in a non-entering state in which game balls cannot enter (closed state) and in an enterable state in which game balls can enter. (Open state). The special winning opening 30 or the special winning device 31 is also referred to as an “attacker”.

  In the right area of the game area 3, a gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is normally obtained, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. When the symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, the normal symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / non-judgment judgment. When the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 27 are provided below the game area 3. The first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the special winning port 30, and the general winning port 27 are each a trigger port for paying out a prize ball, and when a game ball enters the respective trigger port. A predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out at each entrance. Specifically, the number of prize balls of the first starting port 20 is “5”, the number of prize balls of the second starting port 21 is “3”, the number of prize balls of the special winning port 30 is “15”, and the general winning port 27 is Has an award ball number of “10”.

  The game area 3 in which the plurality of entrances (the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the large winning opening 30, the general winning opening 27, and the gate 28) and the like are arranged as described above is centered in the left-right direction ( It can be divided into a left game area (first area) 3A on the left side of the center decoration 10) and a right game area (second area) 3B on the right side. A hitting method of firing a game ball so that a game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hit", and a hitting method of firing a game ball so that a game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hit". " Here, among the plurality of entrances, the first starting port 20 and the left general winning opening 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3 can enter, The second starting port 21, the special winning port 30, the right general winning port 27, and the gate 28 are provided so that game balls flowing down the right game area 3B of the game area 3 can enter. For this reason, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when starting the game, in principle, the left-handed player aims to enter the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes to a special game state or the like due to a big hit in the hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the large winning port, in principle, is right-handed. The goal is to get into 30.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for displaying the first special symbol in a variable display and a stop display, and a second special symbol for displaying the second special symbol in a variable display and a stop display. A display 41b (second special symbol display section) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display section) for changing and displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner are included. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special figure hold display 43a for displaying the number of pieces of the first special symbol holding information (first special figure holding) stored therein, and a second piece of right / wrong judgment information related to the special symbol. A second special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored (second special figure hold), a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of operation hold (general figure hold) of the ordinary symbol display 42, It is included. Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination has been hit, and a first special symbol hit / fail determination or a second special symbol hit / fail. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of a jackpot game to be executed when the result of the determination is a jackpot, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability varying function is activated, and a launch direction of the game ball, that is, a right. A launch direction indicator 47 that indicates whether a hit should be performed (for example, a high base state described later) or a left hit should be performed (for example, a low base state described later). The display of these various displays included in the main display 40 is controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 depending on the special symbol (stop symbol) that has been stopped and displayed. The result of the lottery (special symbol success / failure judgment, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (specific special symbol, specific identification information), that is, a specific mode (special display result) in which the special symbol stop display mode (display result of the special symbol variable display) indicates the big hit In the case of ()), a big hit game (special game) in which the big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol stopped and displayed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening in the big hit game will be described later.

  The stop display of the special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time (fixed display time) elapses. If the special symbol stopped and displayed is a deviated symbol (deviation mode, non-specific mode) and a special figure hold is stored at the time of the stop display, when the stop display time elapses, the storage order is changed. , The oldest (earliest) special figure reservation is exhausted, thereby starting the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol stopped and displayed is a deviated symbol and the special symbol hold is not stored at the time of the stop display, the stop display state of the special symbol is maintained even after the stop display time has elapsed. Is done. On the other hand, when the special symbol stopped and displayed is the big hit symbol, after the stop display time elapses, the game shifts to a jackpot game opening period described later, and the first round of the big hit game is started after the opening period. . Incidentally, the stop display time of the special symbol is generally set to “0.5 seconds to 1.0 second”, and is set to “0.6 seconds” in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol pass / fail determination. In the present embodiment, three types of big hits of “16R first big hit”, “6R second big hit” and “6R third big hit” are provided as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (see FIG. 8). The LED of the first special symbol display 41a can adopt a display mode (specific mode, specific display result) corresponding to each of these three types of jackpots. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is the 16R first big hit, the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the remaining lights are turned off (16R first big hit symbol), and the 6R In case of two big hits, three LEDs of “ino” are turned on and the remaining lights are turned off (6R second big hit symbol), and in case of 6R third big hit, three LEDs of “inp” Is turned on and the rest is turned off (6R third big hit symbol). In the case of a disconnection, the two LEDs of “lo” are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off (a disconnection symbol).

  The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a" to "h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots, “16R fourth jackpot” and “16R fifth jackpot” are provided as a result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (see FIG. 8). The LED 41b can adopt a display mode (specific mode, specific display result) corresponding to each of these two types of big hits. Specifically, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 16R fourth big hit, the three LEDs of “abd” are turned on and the remaining lights are turned off (16R fourth big hit symbol), When five big hits are achieved, the three LEDs “abg” are turned on and the remaining lights are turned off (16R fifth big hit symbol). Further, in the case of a disconnection, the two LEDs “eh” are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off (a release symbol).

  The special symbol stop display mode (stop symbol) and the type of the big hit (the type of the number of rounds, the number of the big hits, etc.) are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined fluctuating time. For example, in the fluctuating display mode, light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. In this way, each LED can be turned on.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various kinds of information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is accepted (“acquisition information”) based on the entering ball. ) Is acquired, and the acquired various information (acquired information) is temporarily stored in a special figure holding storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. More specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored as a first special figure reservation in a first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, It is stored as a second special figure reservation in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown). The number of special figure reservations (acquisition information) that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is “4”. For this reason, it is possible to store up to four pieces of acquisition information acquired in the order of acquisition in each of the special figure holding storage units in the order of acquisition. The first special-figure suspension storage unit and the second special-figure suspension storage unit are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also generally referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”.

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is used when the special symbol change display based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and executing a special symbol change display for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol fluctuation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the ball entry, that is, the special symbol fluctuation Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not to enter the special symbol with respect to the entering ball, up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). I have.

  The number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special map reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs of “uv”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special map reservation, the first special map reservation display 43a is provided. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the hold number is “0”, both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, and ▲: turn on green). Is “1”, the LED of “u” is turned off and the LED of “v” is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. When the number of holds is “2”, “u ● “v □”, the LED of “u” is turned on in red and the LED of “v” is turned off, and when the number of reservations is “3”, both LEDs are turned on as “u ● v ●”. When the number of reservations is “4 (upper limit number)”, both LEDs are lit in green, such as “u ▲ v ▲”.

  Further, the second special figure hold display 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the number of the second special figure hold is displayed. Is displayed. For example, when the number of reservations is “0”, both LEDs are turned off such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green). "1" to "4" are also set in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  The normal symbol change display is performed when a game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the stop-displayed normal symbol (stop symbol) informs the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28. I do. The normal symbol stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / fail determination. When the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (hit ordinary symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays the ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol pass / fail determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a hit, the hit ordinary symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is stopped and displayed as "s @ t @" (for example, ■: turned on, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-usual ordinary design in which only the LED of “t” is turned on, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. It should be noted that the deviated ordinary symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on / off. is there.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random symbol for determining whether or not a symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and the acquired various information is obtained. Is temporarily stored as a general-purpose reservation in a general-purpose storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. The number of general-purpose reservations that can be stored in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is up to a predetermined number, and the upper limit in this embodiment is “4”. The general figure hold stored in the general figure hold storage unit is exhausted when it becomes possible to change and display a normal symbol based on the general figure hold. The term “extension of the ordinary symbol holding” means that the random number for determining whether or not the ordinary symbol corresponds to the ordinary symbol holding is determined, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol and the execution of the auxiliary game. Even in such a case, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is accepted for the passing of the predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general-purpose reservations stored in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is displayed on the general-purpose reservation display 44. More specifically, the general-purpose reservation indicator 44 includes two LEDs “qr”, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by turning on the LEDs in accordance with the number of general-purpose reservations. is there. For example, when the number of reservations is “0”, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, and ▲: turn on green). Is "1", the display mode may be such that the LED of "q" is turned off and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "qr r". Also, the number of reservations “2” to “4” are determined in the same manner as in the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Here, the board surface lamp 5, the image display device 7, the center decorative body 10, the movable decorative members 13, 14 (movable auditorium), the fixed winning device 19 (first starting port 20), the variable winning device 22 (second starting port). 21), the gate 28, the special winning device 31 (the special winning opening 30), and the like, various game parts provided on the game board side are also called "board parts" and "board side parts". Also, the firing handle 60, the effect button 63, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and various control boards (including a board case) and a dispensing device (dispensing motor) to be described later, etc., on the frame side (the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52). Are also referred to as "frame components" and "frame-side components". In a case where the image display device 7 is provided (assembled) on the main body frame 2, the image display device 7 can be regarded as a frame component (frame-side component).

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which controls a game progress and a game profit, such as a special symbol hit / fail judgment, a normal symbol hit / fail judgment, and a transition of a game state. Unit), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", also referred to as an "effect control unit") that performs control relating to effects performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls. An image control board for performing display control of the board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”), the image display device 7, the effect display 102, the effect first special figure reservation display 103 a, the effect second special figure reservation display 103 b, and the like. 100 (image control unit).

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center of the rear side (rear side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case such as an image control board that stores the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and a sub control board 90 that stores the sub control board 90 on the storage case such as the image control board. A case is provided. On the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided, and on the right side, a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the progress of the game and the like, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be provided externally. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit (first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit) and a general figure reservation storage unit. At a predetermined address of a RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), a storage area for use for various flags and various counters is secured.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from the respective sensors to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, as sensors that can detect game balls, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a special winning opening sensor 30a, and a general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detection sensors” and “detection means”.

  The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 28. The special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 30. The general winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each general winning opening 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24 and the special winning port solenoid 33 are connected. These various solenoids are also called “driving means”. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening and closing member 32 of the special winning device 31.

  Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, A drawing hold display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of the main display 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 stores a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). And a launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of game balls according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 via the input / output circuit 117 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 or a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. And pays out prize balls or pays out ball rentals. The payout game balls are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the firing handle 60 of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the contact of the player with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 detects the rotation amount of the firing handle 60. Then, the driving of the firing motor 113 is controlled so that the game ball is fired with the strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be continuously fired by the firing device 112 by driving the firing motor 113 is about 100 per minute.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on the sub-control board 90, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program is mounted. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. . The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another substrate or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91, and the ROM may be externally provided. At a predetermined address of the RAM (effect control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91), a storage area for use for various flags and various counters is secured.

  The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The sub-control board 90 (sub-control section), the image control board 100 (image control section), the audio control board 106 (audio control section), and the ramp control board 107 (lamp control section) are displayed according to the game situation. It functions as an effect execution unit that causes various effects such as an effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect (light effect) to be executed by a corresponding effect device or member (effect effect). Further, as a notice effect execution means for causing various notice effects (suggest effects) suggesting information related to the fluctuation display of the identification information (special symbols and effect symbols) to the corresponding effect device or member (effect effect means). Also works.

  Here, the notice effect is, for example, a display result of the variable display and a display result of the variable display, such as a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a big hit (reliability, expectation) and whether or not a reach effect is performed (executability). Refers to an effect (indicative effect) that suggests information on the process leading to the derivation and display of the information in advance. Broadcasting announcements can be broadly divided into advancement productions related to suspension based on the result of preliminary determination of suspension of special symbols, and advancement productions related to variable display (fluctuating production) during execution. The latter is also referred to as “the advance notice of change”. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute both of these announcement effects.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect first special figure suspension display 103a, and the effect second suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, and symbols (including effect designs, reserve designs, and the like) And image data such as a background image. The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs a fluctuation display and a stop display in accordance with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the effect symbol 8, and turns on / off the two LEDs or a combination of colors to produce the effect symbol 8. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the display result (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment). In addition, the effect first special figure hold display 103a and the effect second hold display 103b also include two LEDs. The effect first special figure reservation display 103a is displayed by the first special figure reservation display 43a and the number of reservations displayed in the first production reservation display area 9c by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining the colors. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of held items as the number of held items. In addition, the effect second special figure hold display 103b is displayed in a display mode that indicates the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. Controlled. This is because a character design is displayed on substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (production design display unit), or a movable design member is operated to operate a part of or a part of the production design display area 7b (production design display unit). By covering the whole, a part or all of the various images displayed on the display screen 7a such as the effect design 8, the first effect suspension 9a, the second effect suspension 9b, etc., may be in a state where it cannot be visually recognized. , Such a display is provided. It should be noted that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sound, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute the audio control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control microcomputer 101 may execute voice control. In this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on a command received from the main control board 80, and based on the command, the light emission pattern data that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 (data that determines the lighting / off, the light emission color, and the like). , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control substrate 107 via the relay substrate 108 based on the command received from the main control substrate 80. Let it. As described above, both the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member 14 are so-called movable gimmicks provided around the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs sub-control of first operation pattern data (also referred to as “first drive data”) for operating the first movable decorative member 13 in a predetermined operation mode when performing the first movable effect. The operation is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the substrate 90, and the operation of the first movable decorative member 13 is controlled based on the determined first operation pattern data. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the second movable effect by executing second operation pattern data (“second drive pattern”) for operating the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable members 14a to 14c) in a predetermined operation mode. ) Is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the operation of the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable members 14a to 14c) is controlled based on the determined second operation pattern data. I do. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Here, the operation of the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member 14 is performed by a drive mechanism (not shown) including an electric drive source such as a stepping motor. Therefore, the above-described first operation pattern data (first drive data) and second operation pattern data (second drive data) can be said to be drive patterns for driving these electric drive sources. In addition, a driving mechanism (not shown) for operating the first movable decorative member 13 can be referred to as a “first movable effecting means”, and similarly, a driving mechanism (not shown) for operating the second movable decorative member 14. ) Can be referred to as “second movable production means”. The operation of the first movable decorative member 13 includes not only the movement between the standby position and the operating position, but also the rotating operation at the operating position and the light emitting operation of a plurality of LEDs (lights). Therefore, the first operation pattern data (first drive data) includes not only the movement of the first movable decorative member 13 but also the pattern data relating to the rotation operation and the light emission operation.

  Also, on the sub-control board 90, a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and The second effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal (detection signal) from the corresponding effect button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. Note that the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are also simply referred to as “effect button detection switches”.

  Next, control (judgment means) for judging whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is appropriate will be described. In the present embodiment, there are "big hit" and "missing" as a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment. At the time of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41, and at "miss", "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a "special game" in which the special winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (big hit type) is executed. The special game executed as a big hit is also called a “big hit game”. The big hit game (special game) is a game that is advantageous for a player who can obtain a large amount of prize balls by entering game balls into the big winning prize opening 30, and the game state in which the big hit game is performed is described as “ Special gaming state ".

  There are a plurality of types of jackpots in this embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, as jackpots, “16R (round) first jackpot”, “6R second jackpot”, “6R third jackpot”, “16R fourth jackpot”, and “16R fifth jackpot” ”Is provided in total. Among these jackpots, "16R 1st jackpot", "6R 2nd jackpot" and "6R 3rd jackpot" are jackpots related to the first special symbol, and "16R 4th jackpot" and "16R 5th jackpot" Is a jackpot according to the second special symbol. In the special symbol display section 41, the big hit symbols corresponding to these big hit types are stopped and displayed.

  More specifically, “16R first big hit”, “16R fourth big hit” and “16R fifth big hit” all have “16” rounds, and the number of times the big winning opening 30 is opened in one round is “16R first big hit”. The opening time of the special winning opening 30 in one time and one round is a big hit of "25 seconds". In both “6R second big hit” and “6R third big hit”, the number of rounds is “6”, the number of times of opening the special winning opening 30 in one round is “one time”, and the one big winning in one round The opening time of the mouth 30 is a big hit of “25 seconds”. However, if a predetermined number (hereinafter, also referred to as “specified number”) of game balls enter the special winning opening 30 before the opening time elapses after the special winning opening 30 is opened, Even if the opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 30 is closed when a specified number of balls have been entered. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is “10”.

  In addition, the round which constitutes a big hit game is also simply referred to as “R” or “round game”. In addition, the 6R second big hit and the 6R third big hit are also collectively referred to as "6R big hit", and the 16R first big hit, 16R fourth big hit and 16R fifth big hit are also collectively referred to as "16R big hit". Further, the jackpot game relating to the 6R jackpot (6R jackpot game) is also referred to as “first special game”, and the jackpot game relating to 16R jackpot (16R jackpot game) is also referred to as “second special game”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit game (the game state after the special game) is changed to a high probability state or a time reduction state, Shift to a high base state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, and the type of the big hit is any of the 16R first big hit, the 6R second big hit, and the 16R fourth big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is over. It is referred to as a “high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state” described later. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit and the type of the big hit is any of the above-mentioned 6R third big hit and 16R fifth big hit, the game state after the big hit game is ended will be described later. "Low probability state, time saving state and high base state". From this, the 16R first jackpot, the 6R second jackpot, and the 16R fourth jackpot can be regarded as “probable variable jackpot”, and the 6R third jackpot and 16R fifth jackpot are “non-probable variable jackpot” (“normal jackpot” or “normal jackpot”). It is also referred to as a "time saving big hit".)

  When the jackpot is determined in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the probability of distribution to each jackpot is 5% for the 16R first jackpot, 50% for the 6R second jackpot, and 50% for the 6R third jackpot. It is 45%. On the other hand, the distribution probability to each big hit in the case of a big hit in the determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 55% for the 16R fourth big hit and 45% for the 16R fifth big hit. Has become. That is, in the case of a big hit by a hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the second starting port 21 (a special figure 2 hit / fail determination), the appearance rate (distribution probability) of the 16R big hit is 100%, The appearance rate (distribution probability) of the 16R big hit is higher than that in the case of the big hit by the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entry into the 1 starting port 20 (special figure 1 hit / fail judgment). As described above, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 rather than the jackpot is determined in the hit / non-judgment judgment (special figure 1 hit / non-judgment) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set such that the greater the hit in the hit / fail determination (the special figure 2 hit / fail determination) performed upon entering the ball, the more likely it is to be advantageous to the player. For this reason, the player plays the game in expectation of the ball entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function described later (when the high base state is occurring) in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on a "special symbol hit / fail judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / judge judgment information ")" Is determined based on "big hit type determining random numbers (also referred to as" symbol determining random numbers "and" symbol determining information ")." As shown in FIG. 7 (A), the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number takes a value in a range from “0 to 629”, and the big hit type determination random number takes a value in a range from “0 to 99”. The random number (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes a “variable pattern random number” in addition to the special symbol success / failure determining random number and the jackpot type determining random number. (Also referred to as “variation pattern information”).

  The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in a range from “0 to 198”. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include a random symbol for determining whether or not the symbol is correct as shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery), and takes a value in a range of “0 to 240”.

  Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination of a probability variation function, a variation time reduction function, and an opening extension function for a special symbol and a normal symbol being in an activated state or a non-activated state. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called a "high probability state" or "probable change state", and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is a "low probability state" or " Normal state ". In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit determination is performed using the big hit determination table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the big hit determination table for the high probability state has a large number of the special symbol hit determination random numbers determined to be the big hit. Is used to determine whether the information is correct (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display being a big hit (the stopped symbol is a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol is not activated. The activation / deactivation of the probability variation function is controlled by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Therefore, the main control board 80 (the game control microcomputer 81) serves as a probability setting means that can set the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol hit / fail judgment to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability). It works.

  The state in which the variation time reduction function is activated for special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state" or a "shortened variation state", and the state in which the variation time reduction function is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". ”Or“ normal fluctuation state ”. In the time reduction state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table determined so that the fluctuation pattern with the shorter fluctuation time is selected more than in the non-time reduction state (see FIG. 9). . As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and an effective ball entering the starting port (a ball that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with a smooth progress of the game. The activation / deactivation of the variation time reduction function is controlled by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Therefore, the main control board 80 (the game control microcomputer 81) functions as a shortened fluctuation state setting means capable of setting a shortened fluctuation state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than usual.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol are operated in synchronization with the variation time reduction function of the special symbol. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the ordinary symbol operate in the special symbol time reduction state and do not operate in the non-hour reduction state. For this reason, in the time reduction state, the hit probability in the ordinary symbol hit determination is higher than in the non-time reduction state. Specifically, in the time saving state, the normal symbol randomness (hit random number) which is determined to be a hit is determined by using a normal symbol hitting determination table that is larger than the normal symbol hitting determination table used in the non-time saving state. Ordinary symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8C).

  In addition, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the symbol is normally 30 seconds in the non-time reduction state, but is 1 second in the time reduction state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the opening number of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, when the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the non-time saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (the second starting port 21) performs the opening operation for 0.2 seconds once, and the time saving state In the case where the result of the normal symbol hit determination is a hit, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (the second starting port 21) performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

  Under the condition that the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to when these functions are not operating. As a result, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of awarded balls to the number of launched balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls (holding balls) on hand.

  The high base state (high frequency state) may not be the state in which all the functions described above operate. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol, and the activation of at least one of the opening time extension function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are activated when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the special symbol time reduction state. The function of generating such a high base state can also be referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game after the big hit game (after the special game) when any of the 16R first big hit, the 6R second big hit, and the 16R fourth big hit is achieved. The state is a special symbol high probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state”. The high-accuracy-high base state ends when a predetermined number of special symbol change displays are executed or a big hit is executed and a big hit game is executed. This high-probability high base state is a so-called “probable change game state” for the player. Hereinafter, the high-probability high-base state is also simply referred to as a “probable change game state”.

  In addition, the game state after the big hit game (after the special game) in the case of any of the 6R third big hit and the 16R fifth big hit becomes a normal state of a special symbol (low probability state) and a time reduction of the special symbol. State and the high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability high base state”. The low-probability-high base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of a special symbol is displayed or a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. This low-probability high base state is a so-called “time reduction game state” for the player. Hereinafter, the low-probability and high-base state is also simply referred to as a "time reduction game state".

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, three game states of “low-probability low-base state”, “low-probability-high-base state”, and “high-precision-high-base state” can be set as the game state. In addition to this, the high probability state of the special symbol and the non-saving time state of the special symbol and the low base state, that is, the “high-accuracy low base state” may be settable. Here, from the viewpoint of the difference in the degree of advantage for the player in the high base state, the low-probability high base state (hour-saving gaming state) is also referred to as a “first gaming state”, and the high-probability high base state (probable changing game state). ) Is also referred to as a “second game state”. In addition, from the viewpoint of comparison between the low base state and the high base state, the low base state (low-probability low-base state, high-probability low-base state) is also referred to as a “first game state”, and the high base state (low-probability) The high base state and the high-accuracy high base state) are also referred to as a “second game state”.

  In a high base state such as a low-probability base state or a high-probability base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by right-handing to advance the game. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because the second starting port has a higher possibility of entering a game ball than the first starting port. For this reason, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger of the normal symbol correctness determination, a right hit is performed so that the game ball enters the second starting port 21. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is accepted) can be obtained as compared with the case where a left hit is performed. In this state, the lighting of the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that a game ball should be fired aiming at the right game area 3B (right strike instruction notification).

  On the other hand, in the low base state (for example, the low-probability low base state), it is possible to advance the game more advantageously when the game ball enters the left game area 3A by left-handing. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and entering the first starting port 20 is easier than entering the second starting port 21. This is because the first starting port has a higher possibility of entering a game ball than the second starting port. Therefore, a left hit is performed so that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is accepted) can be obtained as compared with the case of right-handing. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display control) in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the game ball should be fired aiming at the left game area 3A (left hit instruction notification).

  Here, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs “yz”, and indicates the launch direction by lighting the LED according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, the game ball is directed to the left game area 3A by setting both LEDs to be turned off such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). Can be informed that it should fire. In the high base state, the game ball is directed to the right game area 3B by displaying both LEDs as “y 点灯 z ■” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). Can be informed that it should fire.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the launch instruction notification for instructing which of the left game area 3A and the right game area 3B of the game area 3 to fire the game ball is given by the LED display mode on the launch direction indicator 47. Not only that, but also by displaying a launch instruction image (leftward instruction image 70, rightward instruction image 71) on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). In general, for the player, the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is easier to visually recognize and understand (understand) the display content than the launch direction indicator 47. Therefore, in general, the player sees the launch instruction image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and should perform “left-hand” or “right-hand”, that is, It is determined whether the current gaming state is a “left-handed gaming state” in which the player hits left or a “right-handed gaming state” in which the player plays rightward.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game state is in the special game state (big hit game state) or the high base state (high-precision high-base state, low-precision low-base state), "right-handed" is performed. Therefore, the “right-handed game state” indicates a special game state or a high base state. This “right-handed game state” is also referred to as “predetermined game state”, the “special game state” is also referred to as “first predetermined game state”, and the “high base state” is referred to as “second predetermined game state”. It is also called.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit 80) will be described based on FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, an initial setting is performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter settings Perform reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is incremented by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the interruption processing (S105) becomes possible. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 ms. After the interruption process (S105) is completed, before the next interruption process (S105) is started, the updating process of the various counter values by the regular symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. Be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), first, the output processing (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. I do. The commands output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, the entry of the game ball into various entrances (starting entrance, the special winning opening, etc.), the round, and the like. Various information related to the progress of the game and the like is included. The command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper one byte is information on the type of command, and the lower one byte is information on the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, special winning opening sensor 30a, etc.) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , See FIG. 5), and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. When the special winning opening sensor 30a detects a game ball, the special winning opening ball entry command is stored in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate fullness detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower plate full data.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed during the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105), (The period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), a start opening sensor detection process (S204), a start ball entry process (S205), a general symbol operation process (S206), and a special symbol operation process (S207) described later. Then, the pending ball number processing (S208) and the power-off monitoring processing (S209) are executed. After that, other processing not deeply related to the present invention (S210) is executed, and the interruption processing (S105) is ended. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 next (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (about 4 ms) After that, the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output processing (S201) of the interrupt processing (S105) executed again, the command and the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt processing (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normally reserved balls (normal (Specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of ordinary drawing reservations provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

  If the number of normally reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), “1” is added to the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls (S303), and ordinary symbol random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter (label-TRND-H, see FIG. 7B) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. And stores the obtained random number value (acquisition information) in an address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol retaining balls in the general figure retaining storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S305). , The number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically, the value of a counter for counting the number of second special figure reserved provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number). Is determined (S306). When the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the processing shifts to S309, and when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is less than 4 (YES in S306), the special figure 2 is added to the number of reserved balls (S307).

  Subsequently, a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A is acquired), and the acquired random number value (acquisition is obtained). Information) is stored in the address space according to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S309). If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special map is executed. Whether the number of 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not it is (S310). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S310), the special figure 1 reserved. "1" is added to the number of balls (S311).

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312), similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308), the value of the special symbol hit / fail determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 7A). Numerical values are obtained), and the obtained random numbers are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reserved storage unit.

  Here, among various acquired random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a value determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination. This is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”, and a value that is not determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination (a value determined to be out of this embodiment) is also referred to as “non-specific acquisition information”. In addition, the degree of advantage for the player is relatively low, such as a big hit (for example, 6R third big hit, 16R fifth big hit) which does not trigger the setting of the high probability state, or a big hit with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, 6R big hit). The value determined to be a jackpot is also referred to as “first specific acquisition information”, and a jackpot (eg, a 16R first jackpot, a 6R. A jackpot having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player, such as a jackpot having two large hits, a 16R fourth jackpot, or a jackpot having a relatively large number of rounds in comparison with a jackpot having a relatively small number of rounds (eg, a 16R jackpot). The value determined is also referred to as “second specific acquisition information”.

[Starting ball processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball count has increased by "1" (S315). When it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball count in S307 in the start-up sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second start-up port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure holding storage unit is read (S316). S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number counter (special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value) of the read acquired random numbers is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined. The determination in S317 is a preliminary determination (S1303, S1304) in which the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination as to whether or not a big hit has occurred) is performed prior to the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is to be determined (S1202). This corresponds to a so-called “suspended look-ahead”).

  The pre-judgment as to whether or not a big hit is made is a big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a big hit determination table for a high-probability state in a high-probability state, and a normal in a normal state (low-probability state). Based on the state big hit determination table, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value. Further, as another pre-determination mode, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) can be used to determine variation pattern information. And a fluctuation pattern information determination table. In the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of a random number counter for determining whether a special symbol is accepted or not) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to a game state. It is possible to do. Then, based on the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed, and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the advance determination according to the current game state (probability state) based on the current (at the time of starting ball entry) gaming state, a different from the current game state (probability state) regarding the preliminary determination of whether or not a big hit has occurred. It is also possible to make a preliminary determination according to a game state (probability state) that can be controlled by the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the current gaming state is the low probability state, it is possible to make a preliminary determination assuming that the gaming state is the high probability state, and when the current gaming state is the high probability state, It is possible to perform advance determination assuming that the gaming state is a low probability state. Specifically, if the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state), it is determined whether or not the large hit determination value matches the big hit determination value by the normal state big hit determination table, and the high probability state big hit determination table is used. It is also determined whether or not it matches the big hit determination value, and if the current gaming state is the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the current game state matches the big hit determination value by the big hit determination table for the high probability state, It is determined whether or not the value matches the big hit determination value also by the big hit determination table for the normal state. As a result, the game state when the preliminary determination is performed and the special symbol success / failure determination based on the acquired random number value (acquisition information) that is the target of the preliminary determination after that (that is, when the special figure is held and consumed) Even if the gaming state is different, it is possible to make a preliminary judgment in anticipation of the difference, and to reflect the result in an effect based on the result of the preliminary determination (holding ahead look-ahead effect).

  Next, in S318, game information (advance judgment information) related to the result of the pre-judgment in S317, specifically, information (whether or not) indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the big hit determination value, Command data including information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number for determining the jackpot type), information indicating the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), etc. And the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). A part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board as the special figure 2 start entering ball command, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but may transmit game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number.

  In this embodiment, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is information relating to the big hit, which is the big hit type, and the variation pattern is It is assumed that the sub-control unit 90 is able to identify whether or not. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and a low probability It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur if the state is determined. Thus, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the performance hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  Note that, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the special symbol success / failure determination random number value among the acquired random number values read in S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit value) is not transmitted. Command data including information indicating the value of the type determination random number), the value of the fluctuating pattern random number counter (fluctuating pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of the pre-determination is generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command. It is possible to set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres has increased by "1", similarly to the processing relating to the aforementioned special figure 2 (S319). When it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to a case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated.

  In S320, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S320), and if it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S320), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S320 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the processing related to the preliminary determination from S321. Here, when the time reduction flag is ON, that is, when the current game state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is activated, It is in a state where the determination (see FIG. 8B) is easily performed. Further, in the present embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 suspension digestion (second special symbol fluctuation display) is executed prior to the special figure 1 reservation digestion (first special symbol fluctuation display) ( (A so-called special figure 2 priority variation machine). In such a configuration, for example, the preliminary determination of Toku-zu 1 is performed, and the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a preliminary announcement. If it is specified that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the player By using the priority of the special figure 2 reservation digestion, the special figure 2 reservation is intentionally eliminated at an arbitrary timing (set to “0”), and the big hit according to the special figure 1 in which the result of the preliminary determination is shown is shown. Technical intervention such as intentional generation is possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of generating the big hit in this way. Therefore, if the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S320), the processing relating to the advance determination of the special figure 1 after S321 is not performed, and the present processing (at the time of starting ball entry) Processing).

  The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure holding storage unit is read (S321). Preliminary judgment is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information related to the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the advance determination (pre-read ahead) in S322 is performed prior to the hit / fail determination (S1603, S1604) in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207) described later.

  Here, in the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and it is easy to determine whether the special figure 2 is correct (see FIG. 8B). In other words, the display of the change of the second special symbol is frequently executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is assumed that the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed prior to the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation (variable display of the first special symbol). I have. In such a configuration, for example, the preliminary determination of Toku-zu 1 is performed, and the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a preliminary announcement. If it is specified that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the player By using the priority of the special figure 2 reservation digestion, the special figure 2 reservation is intentionally eliminated at an arbitrary timing (set to “0”), and the big hit according to the special figure 1 in which the result of the preliminary determination is shown is shown. Technical intervention such as intentional generation is possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of generating the big hit in this way.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the current game state is the high base state (YES in S320), the processing related to the advance determination of the special figure 1 after S321 is not performed. In other words, the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 (the preliminary determination of the special figure 1) is performed not in the high base state but in the low base state, and the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 preliminary determination) is performed. Is performed irrespective of the low base state or the high base state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described later, the gaming machine is controlled to be in a low-probability and low-base state during the jackpot game, but the gaming ball enters the first starting port 20 during the jackpot game, and Even if the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 increases by “1”, the processing of S321 to S323 (special figure 1 pre-determination processing) is not performed.

[Public figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general-purpose operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start ball entry process (S205). In the general drawing operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “usual symbol operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), a normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “usual symbol operation status” is “2” (S401). , NO in S403), the normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the "general symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is determined. The process (S406) is performed, and when the “ordinary figure operation status” is “4” (S401, S403, and S405 are all NO), the normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. Incidentally, the normal operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the ordinary symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is “0” (S501), and if it is “0” (YES in S501). ), End this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, if the gaming state is a time reduction state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. I do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the non-time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern in which the ordinary symbol variation time is 30 seconds is selected. When the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503) is completed, a later-described ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) is performed, and then, a normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process ends. In the ordinary symbol variation start process, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the ordinary operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal symbol change.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the ordinary symbol hit / fail determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol hit / fail determination stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage unit is read (S601). . Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time reduction state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the vehicle is in the time reduction state (YES in S602), the table for the time reduction state (the collision determination value is “ 0 ”to“ 239 ”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit, based on the high-probability general-purpose approval / disapproval determination (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value of the read random number counter (label-TRND-H) matches any one of the hit determination values. On the other hand, in S602, when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the non-time reduction state table (the It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by the low-probability general-purpose approval / disapproval determination based on the determination values “0” and “1” (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure hit / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605). (Shift out of ordinary figure) is determined (S606), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Regular pattern random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shifting process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by one (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the general-purpose reservations in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the general-purpose reserve storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general-purpose reserve storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this manner, the general drawing reservation is digested in the reservation order.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process ends. . On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the ordinary symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the display of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol with a display result (hit ordinary symbol or out-of-range ordinary symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for the ordinary symbol hit determination (S804) is performed. Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ordinary figure flag is ON (YES in S901), subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the time reduction state (S902). If it is during the time reduction state (YES in S902), the release pattern during the time reduction state is set as the release pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern during the time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start-up opening counter that counts the number of times the second start-up opening 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the release pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The release pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, a release pattern in which release for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port opening counter. Then, following the setting of the release pattern (S903, S906), the general-purpose operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary figure end flag is ON (S1001). The ordinary figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

  If the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (timing) (S1003). If not (NO in S1003), the process is terminated. If there is (YES in S1003), the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second start-up port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second start-up port 21 (ie, whether the second start-up port 21 has been opened or not). Is determined (S1005), and if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). ) (S1006).

  Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is “0”. A determination is made (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), a per-figure per end processing for terminating the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and a per-figure per end flag is set (S1010) to end the processing. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes “0” when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time reduction state, and during the non-time saving state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

  On the other hand, if the end flag per ordinary drawing is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The hit end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interruption process, the ordinary symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the ordinary symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S207) following the ordinary diagram operation process (S206). In the special figure operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device 31 is divided into four stages, and each of these stages is referred to as "special figure operation status 1, 2, 3". , 4 ". When the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), a special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). NO, S1103: YES), special symbol variation processing (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (S1101, NO in S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is determined. The process (S1106) is performed, and if the "special figure operation status" is "4" (S1101, S1103, and S1105 are all NO), the special electric auditors product process (S1107) as a big hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved ball of special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). ). If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) is “0” (S1206). If the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the process of setting the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (during execution of the customer waiting demonstration screen) is performed (S1211), and if the process is set as the standby screen (YES in S1211). If the process is completed and the standby screen is not being processed (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212). In the standby screen setting process, a customer wait start command for instructing display start (customer wait start) of the standby screen (demo screen) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. When the customer waiting start command is output (transmitted) to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201), the sub-control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) sends the image control board 100 (the image control microcomputer 101) to the image control board 100 (the image control microcomputer 101). A display of a standby screen is instructed, whereby a standby screen (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  In the case where the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not “0” in S1201 (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, The special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1202), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), and the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” but the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not “0” (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value of the second starting port 21 Although there is no storage, if there is at least one storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207) described later, the special figure 1 change The pattern selection processing (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and the special figure 1 change start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the present embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the second special figure reservation is “0” (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special figure reservation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure reservation (variable display of the first special symbol). Then, in the present embodiment, it is easier for the player to determine whether the winning or rejection based on the second special figure reservation is a bigger hit than the winning or rejection determination based on the first special figure reservation (FIG. 8B). See).

[Special figure 2 hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 win / fail determination processing (S1202), first, as the determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b of the RAM (ie, the first area of the second special figure holding) The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for the special symbol hit / fail judgment stored in the (oldest memory) stored in the RAM area corresponding to (1) (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability state (S1302). Then, if the state is not the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if the state is the normal state, the big hit determination table for the normal state among the big hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8A (the big hit determination values are “3” and “3”). 397 ") based on the result (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), a win / fail determination is made based on the large hit determination table for the high probability state among the big hit determination tables (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1304) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1305), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read out, and FIG. The big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown (S1307), the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1308), the big hit flag is turned on (S1309), and the process is terminated. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is not "big hit" (NO in S1305), a lost symbol is determined (S1306), and the process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the hit determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined by using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination of the second special symbol, the hit is determined for the second special symbol. The big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table. Here, the jackpot determination (special symbol hit / fail determination) and the jackpot type determination determination may each be referred to as “judgment”, or may be referred to as “judgment” including the jackpot determination and the type of the jackpot. Good. These results may also be referred to as “determination results”.

  Here, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 6R lamp and a 16R lamp (see FIG. 4). Then, for example, when a 6R big hit occurs, the 6R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Specifically, a display mode such as “6 ▲ 16” is displayed. When the big hit is reached, the 16R lamp is lit at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Specifically, a display mode such as “6 △ 16 ▲” is obtained.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing is performed (S1203) following the special figure 2 win / fail determination processing (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time reduction state (whether or not the time reduction flag is ON) (S1401). ). If it is determined in S1401 that the state is not the time reduction state (NO in S1401), that is, if the state is the non-time reduction state, then it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (S1402). In S1402, when it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1402), referring to the non-time saving state big hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Next, the process proceeds to S1404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is “1” or “2” (S1405). The number of reservations referred to here is the number of storages including information for determining the fluctuation pattern by the present process, and thus the number of storages to be reserved is any value of “1” to “4”. Then, if it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is “1” or “2” (YES in S1405), the first hold number departure table (the non-time-saving state and deviate from the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The change pattern is selected based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the number of reserved balls “1, 2” (S1406). In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1405 that the hold number is not “1” or “2”, that is, it is “3” or “4” (NO in S1405), the second hold number deviation table (variation shown in FIG. 9) The change pattern is selected based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the non-time saving state, out of the pattern table, and the portion corresponding to the number of retained balls "3, 4" (S1407). ). In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the possibility of selecting a variation pattern of a relatively long variation time is set higher in the first reserved number deviation table than in the second reserved number deviation table. In addition, the shortest selectable fluctuation time (12000 ms) is also longer than that of the second hold count deviation table (4000 ms).

  If it is determined in S1401 that the vehicle is in the time saving state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (S1408). If it is determined in S1408 that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1408), the fluctuation pattern is referred to the time-saving state big hit table (the portion corresponding to the time-saving state and the big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1408), then it is determined whether the number of holds is “1” (S1410). The number of reservations here is also the same as described above, and the number of reservations is any one of “1” to “4”. In S1410, when it is determined that the number of holds is “1” (YES in S1410), the third hold number departure table (in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. With reference to the corresponding part), a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). In the present embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P15 to P18 is selected. If it is determined in S1410 that the number of holds is not “1”, that is, it is determined that the number of holds is any of “2” to “4” (NO in S1410), the fourth out-of-number-of-holds table (FIG. 9) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. (S1411). In this embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the variation pattern that is selected in the case of the time saving state and the deviation is shorter than the variation pattern selected in the case of the non-time reduction state and the deviation, and the possibility that the short variation pattern is selected is increased. I have. This is to increase the speed of digesting the special figure reservation (promptly advance the game during the time reduction) by selecting more fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time in the time reduction state.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is performed (S1404), and the processing ends. In the other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a fluctuation pattern designation command according to the selected fluctuation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern designation command set in this processing is included in a fluctuation start command described later and transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is set to one lower position (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses “0000” to “0003”). , Address “0000” side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure hold fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

  After executing the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), the special figure 2 change start processing (S1205) shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 2 change start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the second special symbol is started.

  In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 22, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) The special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure holding storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first first special figure holding) is stored. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for reading a special symbol is read and processed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), the processing (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage locations of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit are shifted down by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored) Is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends.

  After executing the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), the special figure 1 change start processing (S1210) shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 change start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 described above (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thus, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probable variable flag is ON (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probable variable counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and whether or not the value of the probable variable counter is "0". Is determined (S1905). If it is determined in step S1905 that the probability change counter is “0”, the probability change flag is turned off (S1906), and the flow shifts to the processing in step S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S1903), and when it is determined that the probable change counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

  Here, when the probable change flag is turned off in S1906, a state change command indicating that the game state transitions (changes) from the high-probability high base state (probable change game state) to the low-probability low base state (normal game state). (Game state change information) is set in the output buffer of the RAM by including it in the fluctuation start command relating to the start of the fluctuation display of the next special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the value (set value) to be set in the probability change counter in the process of S2203 described below with the end of the jackpot game relating to the probability change jackpot is set to “10,000”. Is unlikely to become “0” when the special symbol stops changing (end of change). It should be noted that the state change command can be set in the output buffer of the RAM as a separate command from the change start command (transmitted to the sub-control board).

  In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S1907), and if it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed during the time reduction state is counted. The value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (S1909). If it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time reduction flag is turned off (S1910). Then, the process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON (NO in S1907), and if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

  Here, when the time saving flag is turned off in S1910, a state change command indicating that the game state shifts (changes) from the low-accuracy high base state (time-saving game state) to the low-accuracy low base state (normal game state). (Game state change information) is set in the output buffer of the RAM by including it in the fluctuation start command relating to the start of the fluctuation display of the next special symbol. In the present embodiment, the value (set value) to be set in the time-saving counter in the process of S2207 described later with the end of the jackpot game relating to the non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) is set to “100”. After the end of the big hit game (normal big hit), if the change display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, the value of the time reduction counter becomes “0”. Even when the game state shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal state, as described above, the state change command is set in the output buffer of the RAM as a command different from the change start command (transmitted to the sub control board). Is also possible.

  In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the display of the change of the special symbol with a result according to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing ends.

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the determined big hit type is a 16R big hit, and if it is determined to be a 16R big hit (YES in S2002), it is executed during the big hit game. The value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be performed is set to “16” (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the type of big hit is not 16R big hit (NO in S2002), the determined big hit type is 6R big hit, so the value of the round counter is set to "6" (S2004), and S2009 Move to the processing of.

  In S2009, a special winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (kind) is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. Here, as described above, since the opening pattern of the special winning opening is determined according to the type of the big hit, the special winning opening pattern corresponding to the big hit determined this time is set (see FIG. 6). Then, in each of the jackpot games, the opening operation of the special winning opening 30 based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in S2009 is executed.

  In S2010, a big hit opening command is set to start a big hit game (S2010). In this embodiment, as opening commands, a first opening command corresponding to 16R first big hit, a second opening command corresponding to 6R second big hit, a third opening command corresponding to 6R third big hit, and 16R fourth big hit A total of five types of the corresponding fourth opening command and the fifth opening command corresponding to the 16R fifth big hit are provided. In S2010, an opening command is set according to the type of the jackpot determined this time (starting jackpot). Then, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201), and receives the opening command. The unit 90 performs a predetermined game effect execution process based on the opening command.

  After the opening command is set, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012). If it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special map operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process is terminated. The opening period is a period that is set before starting the opening operation of the special winning opening in the big hit game and after the display of the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is disabled, and is referred to as “start period”. It is also called. The effect performed in the “start period” is also referred to as “start effect (opening effect)”. In the present embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of the determined big hit and the gaming state when the big hit is fixed (that is, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). The opening period can be specified by the above-mentioned opening command. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command can perform an opening effect based on the jackpot type and the opening period specified by the opening command. In the above-described special symbol determination processing (S1106), the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the processing (S2002 to S2012) for changing the game state to the special game state (the state in which the big hit game is executed) is "game state control". It functions as "means".

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric accessory processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the probable change flag is ON (YES in S2101), The probable change flag is turned off (S2102), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If it is determined in S2101 that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process of S2102, and if it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON in S2103 (NO in S2103), The process proceeds to S2105 without performing the process of S2104. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the state is controlled to the low probability state and the non-time saving state. In the present embodiment, the low base state is always set during the non-time saving state, so that the big base game is controlled to the low base state during execution.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that all of the operation processing of the big winning device 31 (opening of the big winning port 30) in the big hit game is completed (the big hit game is finished). If the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether it is time to start a round (S2106). This is determined based on the special winning opening opening pattern set for each of the above-mentioned big hit types. For example, before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether or not it is time to finish the opening period and execute the first opening process of the first round. If the first round has already been started, the determination is made based on whether or not the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period has ended (interval time has elapsed).

  If it is determined in S2106 that it is the round start time (YES in S2106), a round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2107), and a special winning opening opening process is performed (S2108). In S2107, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. In S2108, mainly, the processing for enabling the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 30a and the opening and closing member for opening the special winning opening 30 based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in S2009 described above. Then, a process of opening 32 is performed, and one round game is started.

  Here, regarding the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening sensor 30a, “effective (validation)” means that when the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening sensor 30a occurs, the detection is sent to the special winning opening 30. It means that it is treated (processed) as a normal incoming ball. On the other hand, "invalidation (invalidation)" means that when a game ball is detected by the special winning opening sensor 30a, the detection is treated as an abnormal ball entry into the special winning opening 30 (large winning opening error). (Process). In the present embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 30a is effective, in principle, from the start of the round game to the lapse of a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) after the end of the round game. This period is set as a valid period for detecting a game ball by the special winning opening sensor 30a. The game control microcomputer 81 which performs the process related to setting the valid period of the game ball detection by the special winning opening sensor 30a functions as "effective period setting means". Note that if the special winning opening sensor 30a detects a game ball during a period other than the valid period (ineffective period), the detection is invalidated, and abnormal entry into the special winning opening 30 (a special winning opening error) has occurred. (A special winning opening error command) is transmitted from the main control unit 80 to the sub control unit 90. In response to this, the sub-control unit 90 performs a process related to the execution of an error notification for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal ball entry into the special winning opening 30 (a special winning opening error) to the outside.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process shifts to S2112. Here, when it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during an opening period before the start of one round, during a round game, during an interval period after the end of the round game (during a special winning opening closing process) and the like. .

  In S2112, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the special winning opening opened in the process of S2108 is still being opened (round game) (S2112). As a result, when it is determined that the special winning opening operation is not being performed (round game) (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2116, and the special winning opening operation is being performed (round game). If it is determined (YES in S2112), it is determined whether or not the end condition (round end condition) of the round game being executed is satisfied (S2113).

  Here, as the round end conditions of the present embodiment, (1) opening time of the special winning opening (for example, “25 seconds”) determined in the round game being executed, that is, elapse of the execution time of the round game, 2) In the round game being executed, two conditions are set in that a predetermined number (for example, "10") of game balls have entered the special winning opening. If any one of the conditions is satisfied first, the round end condition is satisfied based on the previously satisfied condition. In addition, during the big hit game (during round game), as long as the game ball is fired without any error or trouble in which the game ball cannot be fired without any trouble, the condition (2) is satisfied and the round ends. Usually, the condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2113), the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), the round end command of the corresponding round is issued. It is set (S2114), and a special winning opening closing process is performed (S2115). In S2114, a round end command that can specify the round to be ended is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

  Next, in S2116, it is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S2116), and when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (during the interval period) (NO in S2116), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2116 that the interval time has elapsed (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2118). ). If it is determined in S2118 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2119), and the jackpot ending period is started. Then (S2120), the big hit end flag is turned on (S2121), and the process is terminated. The value of the round counter becomes “0” when all round games in the jackpot game to be executed are completed.

  In S2119, from a plurality of predetermined ending commands, an ending command corresponding to the game state at the time of occurrence of the current big hit, the type of the current big hit, the game state after the big hit game, and the like are selected, and the selected ending command is selected. Command is set. The ending period (ending time) to be executed (set) is determined by the type of the ending command thus set. The ending period is a period that is set after all the opening operations of the special winning opening 30 in the jackpot game are completed and before the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) can be executed, and the “ending period”. It is also called. In the ending period (end period), the special winning opening 30 is in a closed state. The effect performed during this “end period” is also referred to as “end effect (ending effect)”.

  Then, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the ending command set in S2119 to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and receives the ending command. The sub-control unit 90 performs a predetermined ending effect execution process based on the ending command.

  Also, in S2105, when it is determined that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the last round in the big hit game is finished, it is determined whether the big hit ending time has elapsed, that is, the above-mentioned S2120 It is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending period started in the process (S2122), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the big hit flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interruption processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation processing (FIG. 21). The game control microcomputer 81 that executes the special electric auditors product process (S1107) functions as a “special game execution unit” and a “round game execution unit”.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, the three types of the 16R first big hit, the 6R second big hit, and the 16th fourth big hit are set as the probable variable hits. It is determined whether or not. Then, if it is determined that the end of this time is the probability change big hit (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), and the probability change counter is set to "10,000" (S2203). Is turned on (S2204), "10,000" is set in the time reduction counter (S2205), and the process ends.

  Here, the value set in the probability change counter is the number of times the special symbol hit / fail judgment can be executed with a high probability. The value of "10,000" (10,000 times) set in the present embodiment is the jackpot probability in the high probability state, the business hours of the amusement store per day, and the special figure validity determination that can be executed within the business hours. Considering the number of times and the like, it is substantially the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until the next big hit occurs or until the business hours end. Therefore, when the gaming state is set to the high probability state, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (substantially synonymous). When the probability change flag is ON, "10,000" is similarly set in the time saving counter. Therefore, while the high probability state is set, the time saving state (open extended state) is set together. You can say. In other words, when the big hit game related to the probability change big hit is finished, the gaming state becomes the “highly accurate high base state”. Incidentally, as in the present embodiment, the value of "10,000" may be set in the probability change counter and the time saving counter, and the high precision height base state may be set substantially until the next big hit, or the probability change flag may be set. When the time reduction flag is ON, control may be adopted such that the high-precision high-base state is set until the next big hit occurs without setting a value to the counter.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that it is not a probability change big hit (NO in S2201), that is, if the game that has ended this time is a big hit game related to a non-probability change big hit (normal big hit), the time The flag is turned on (S2206), and the time reduction counter is set to "100" (S2207), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the two types of the 6R third big hit and the 16R fifth big hit are non-probable variable hits (normal hits), when the big hit game related to any of these two types ends, The game state becomes the “low-probability high-base state”. This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (special symbol success / failure determination is performed 100 times) and the next big hit occurs. I do. The time-saving counter and the probable change counter are for counting the number of times that the number of times of display of the first special symbol and the number of times of display of the second special symbol are added. The game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above-described game state setting process (S2124) functions as "game state control means".

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (S208) following the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 35, in the reserved ball count processing (S208), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count, the special figure 2 reserved ball count, and the normal symbol reserved ball count stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read. (S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data relating to the number of reserved balls (reserved ball number command) is output by the output processing (S201) in the next interrupt processing (S105), and the data relating to the reserved ball number (reserved ball number command) is output for each interruption processing. Are set in the output buffer (S2502) and the output process (S201) is sequentially performed. When the sub-control unit 90 that has received the reserved ball count command determines that the number of special figure reserved balls has increased or decreased based on the received reserved ball count command, the sub-control unit 90 accordingly displays the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Are updated in the effect hold display areas (first effect hold display area 9c and second effect hold display area 9d). Specifically, for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by one from “3” to “4”, the first effect reservation 9a corresponding to the increased number of special figure 1 reserved balls “4” is added. It is additionally displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases from “2” to “1” by 1 (that is, when the first special figure reserved is exhausted), the left end of the first effect reserved display area 9c (special figure 1 reserved) The first effect suspension 9a displayed at the position corresponding to the number of balls "1" (see FIG. 3) is moved to the fluctuation suspension display area 9e (see FIG. 3), and accordingly, the first effect suspension is performed. The first effect holding 9a displayed in the display area 9c is moved (shifted) to the left by one.

  The data of the number of special figure reserved balls when the number of special figure reserved balls is added, that is, the data of the number of special figure reserved balls accompanying the occurrence of a starting ball (starting winning), is included in the above described starting ball input command. Alternatively, the command may be set in the output buffer together with the ball entry command indicating the number of special figure reserved balls after addition (after the start ball entry). In addition, the data of the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved special figure balls is subtracted, that is, the data of the number of reserved special ball balls accompanying the start of the change of the special symbol (extension of the special figure reservation), is transmitted to the above-mentioned change start command. It is also possible to include in the output buffer together with the change start command the number of spheres to be retained or the number of spheres to be retained after the subtraction (after the digestion of the extraordinary terrain).

[Power-off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) following the reserved ball count process (S208). As shown in FIG. 36, in the power-off monitoring process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether the game is stable, whether the game is hit or not, the number of pending balls, and the number of remaining changes (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter, loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, an operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 37 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is YES (YES in S4002), the flow proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, when the power-off signal is not ON, or when the contents of the RAM are not normal even when the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are normally maintained (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets various flags, statuses, and counter values. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. Then, the data relating to the effect control at that time is to be stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data relating to the effect control at the time of power failure such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, at the time of power-on (when power is restored) after the power is restored after a power failure such as a power failure, the production control by the production control microcomputer 91 is performed unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003). Returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, the interrupt is prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random number for variable effect determination that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for announcement effect determination that determines the announcement effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the method of updating the random numbers performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added not by one but by two. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing may be, for example, when a control signal (start-in ball command) notifying that there is a start-in ball from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of change from the main control board 80). (A change start command) is transmitted, or a change effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update processing (S4005) ends, a command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. The command is transmitted to the control board that is the corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command performs various effects using various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to big hit games, etc.) are executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member are performed. It is possible to perform control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 38, whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not an input has been made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process is terminated. . This reception interruption processing (S4008) is processing executed prior to other interruption processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 39, in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). ). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and driving data for driving the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member. Is output (S4203). The lamp data and the driving data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Finally, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, a later-described received command analysis processing (S4302) is performed. Next, a switch status acquisition process is performed to store the switch data generated in the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch status acquisition process is executed. A switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). Thereafter, lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and drive data (data for controlling the operation of the first movable decorative member 13 and the second movable decorative member 14) are generated. Or other processing such as updating the effect determination random number (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the received command analysis processing (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start entering ball command is received from the main control board 80 (S4390). If it is determined (NO in S4390), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4390), the effect hold information storage process (S4395) and the hold notice setting process (S4400) are performed. Then, the process proceeds to S4401.

  The effect hold information storage processing (S4395) is a process for storing various information (pre-judgment result, big hit type determination disturbance) included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball input command or special figure 2 start ball input command) received in S4390. The game information such as a numerical value, a fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) is determined according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the number of special figure reserved balls at the time of transmission / reception of the starting ball entry command (at the time of command generation). Are stored in a predetermined effect suspension information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. As described above, the pre-judgment based on the start ball entry (see FIG. 13) is included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball entry command, special figure 2 start ball entry command) sent from the main control board 80. ) Is performed, the information on the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as “suspended pre-reading information”), specifically, the hit / fail information related to the special symbol hit / fail determination and the jackpot type information indicating the random number value for the jackpot type determination; Since fluctuation pattern information indicating a fluctuation pattern random number value is included, such information is stored as effect suspension information.

  For example, if the received start ball entry command is a special figure 1 start ball entry command corresponding to the reserved ball number “4” of the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command Is stored as special figure 1 effect suspension information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect suspension information storage area. The effect holding information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode to be described later. The storage contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the storage content (acquisition information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect suspension information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  In addition, the hold notice setting process (S4400) displays the effect on-hold display areas (first effect on-hold display area 9c, second effect on-hold display area 9d) and the change on-hold display area 9e on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a process for making settings relating to a notice effect (hold notice effect) performed using the effect hold (first effect hold 9a, second effect hold 9b). Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold change notice in which the display form of the effect hold is changed to a display form different from normal (notice display form) as the hold notice effect. In other words, as the effect hold that can be displayed in the effect hold display area or the like, there are a plurality of effect holds with different display modes, and the plurality of effect holds include the normal effect hold (normal storage display ) And a specific effect hold (specific storage display) which is a notice display mode different from the normal display mode. Then, when a special figure hold (first special figure hold or second special figure hold) is stored due to the starting ball, the normal effect hold is usually displayed as the effect hold in the effect hold display area. The execution of the hold notice effect (hold change notice) causes the specific effect hold to be displayed as the effect hold. In the present embodiment, a normal production hold and a specific production hold are provided for each of the first production reservation 9a and the second production reservation 9b, and a reservation change notice for the first production reservation 9a and a first production reservation are made. It is possible to execute a pending change notice for 9a. The details of the hold notice effect (hold change notice) and the hold notice setting process (S4400) of this embodiment will be described later.

  Next, in S4401, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4401), a fluctuation effect start process (to be described later) ( S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4406 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4403), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to perform the fluctuation effect. The variable effect ending process to be ended is performed (S4404). In the variable effect end processing (S4404), a variable effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variable effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 which has been variable displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display is performed, and the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4403 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4403), the flow shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect ending processing. Note that the variable effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, such as the variable display of the effect symbol 8 and the reach effect.

  Subsequently, in S4405, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). Here, the jackpot game-related command means that the game state controlled by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) becomes the special game state, and the main control is performed when the special jackpot game (round game) is executed in the special game state. A command transmitted from the board 80. Specifically, an opening command (see S2010) transmitted at the start of a jackpot game (special game state), a round start command (see S2107) transmitted at the start of a round, and a special winning opening 30 in the round. , A round winning command transmitted at the end of the round (see S2114), an ending command transmitted at the end of the big hit game (special game) (see S2119) And so on. In S4405, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received. If the command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407, and if it has been received (YES in S4405). Then, a jackpot game-related effect process related to execution of various jackpot game effects according to the type of the received command is performed (S4406).

  In S4406, for example, if the received jackpot game-related command is an opening command, an opening effect command specifying an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and a round start command If so, a round start effect command designating an effect according to the start of the round specified based on the command (round start corresponding effect) is set in the sub output buffer. A ball entry effect command for designating a ball entry effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 30 specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. If the received jackpot game-related command is a round end command, a round end effect command designating an effect corresponding to the end of the round specified based on the command (round end corresponding effect) is set in the sub output buffer. If the command is an ending command, an ending effect command that specifies an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer.

  When the jackpot game-related command set in the sub output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the jackpot game (special game state) or the progress of the round. Then, an effect (big hit game effect) related to the big hit game such as an opening effect or a round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low-probability and low-base state (normal gaming state), that is, in the “left-handed gaming state”, the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit (so-called When the sub-control board 90 receives an opening command related to the big hit (first hit), the big hit (first hit), a corresponding first hit opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an opening effect including a right-handing instruction information instructing the player to perform a right-handing to make the game ball enter the special winning opening 30 ("Initial hit") Opening effect). In the first hit opening effect (not shown) according to the present embodiment, a right hit instruction notification at the start of the big hit game (also referred to as “first hit right hit instruction information”) relating to the first hit is executed. The right hit instruction notification for the first hit in the present embodiment is to display a moving image depicting a state in which a game ball enters the large winning opening 30 located at the lower part of the right game area 3B at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. It is to be performed by. This allows the player who has proceeded the game (symbol changing game) by performing a left-hand in the low base state to perform a right-hand in the special game state (big hit game) (the game ball toward the right game area 3B). ) Can be positively encouraged.

  When the sub-control board 90 receives a round start command (1R start command) of the first round at the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit, the 1R start effect command corresponding thereto is displayed on the image control board. Sent to 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a round effect display including a round number display is started (executed), and a right-turn instruction is given as a right-turn instruction notification during a big hit game (during a special game state). The display of the image 71 is started (executed) (see FIG. 52A). The right-handed instruction image 71 is continuously displayed in the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy high base state (that is, the right-handed game state) after the big hit game related to the first hit is completed (FIG. 52 (b) )). The process of starting the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (right-handed instruction image display process) will be described later. Note that the notification of the right-handed instruction by displaying the right-handed instruction image 71 is also referred to as “predetermined instruction notification”.

  Further, a big hit occurs in a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state (that is, a right-handed game state) after the big hit game related to the first hit is completed (so-called “ren-chan”), and When the sub-control board 90 receives the opening command related to (chan), a corresponding consecutive opening effect command is transmitted to the image control board 100. In response to this, on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, an opening effect (also referred to as “continuous opening effect”) having contents different from the above-described initial hit opening effect is executed. In the consecutive opening opening effect (not shown), a right hit instruction notification for a first hit like the above-described first hit opening effect, that is, a moving image displaying a state in which a game ball enters the special winning opening 30 is displayed. The right-handed instruction image 71 (see FIG. 52B) displayed during the game in the high base state without being executed is continuously displayed. This is because the high base state is a “right-handed gaming state”, and it is not necessary to change the firing direction of the game ball when executing the big hit game relating to the consecutive chan.

  Finally, the process of S4407 is performed, and this process (reception command analysis process) is completed. In S4407, as another process, a process based on another received command (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) other than the above-described various commands is performed.

[Hold notice setting process]
Next, the suspension notice setting process (S4400) executed in the reception command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the production suspension (the first production suspension display area 9c and the second production suspension display area 9d) and the production suspension (the second production suspension display area 9e) displayed on the display screen 7a are displayed. It is possible to perform a hold announcement effect (in this example, a change change announcement) using the first effect suspension 9a and the second effect suspension 9b). The hold notice setting process (S4400) is a process for determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect, and selecting and setting an execution pattern (hold notice effect pattern) when executing.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the suspension notice setting process (S4400), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the low base state (S4451). This determination can be made, for example, based on the mode status (see FIG. 43) referred to in S4503 described below. As will be described in detail later, the mode status referred to in S4503 indicates the current production mode. Are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state, and the effect modes C to E are executed when the game state is controlled to the high base state. In accordance with this, in S4451, the current effect mode is specified with reference to the mode status, and based on the current effect mode, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state.

  If it is determined in S4451 that the current gaming state is the low base state (YES in S4451), it is determined whether or not the starting ball entry command received in S4390 is the special figure 1 starting ball entry command. (S4452), if it is not a special figure 1 start entering command (NO in S4452), this processing is ended without performing the processing after S4454, and if it is a special figure 1 start entering command (YES in S4452), S4454 Proceed to. Also, in S4451, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the low base state (NO in S4451), that is, if the current gaming state is the high base state, the start entering ball command received in the previous S4390 is It is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 start ball entry command (S4453). If it is not a special figure 2 start ball input command (NO in S4453), this processing ends without performing the processing of S4454 and thereafter, and the special figure 2 If it is a 2 start ball entry command (YES in S4453), the flow proceeds to S4454.

  Here, the low base state is a gaming state in which a game is advanced by left-handing (left-handed gaming state), and is a gaming state in which the display of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 mainly progresses. is there. Therefore, if the start ball-in command received in the low base state is not the special figure 1 start ball-in command, that is, if it is a special figure 2 start ball-in command (NO in S4452), the start ball-in is in the low base state. In this case, the ball is likely to normally enter the second starting port 21, which is unlikely to occur, so it can be said that the ball is an irregular (exceptional) starting ball. The high base state is a gaming state in which the game is advanced by right-handing (right-handed gaming state), and is a gaming state in which the display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 mainly progresses. . Therefore, if the start ball-in command received in the high base state is not the special figure 2 start ball-in command, that is, if it is a special figure 1 start ball-in command (NO in S4452), the start ball-in is in the high base state. In this case, the ball is likely to enter the first starting port 20, which is unlikely to occur normally, and it can be said that the ball is an irregular (exceptional) starting ball. In this embodiment, S4452 and S4453 are used in order to prevent a special announcement from being held based on an irregular (exceptional) starting ball that does not conform to such a game state, and not to perform a hold notice effect. Processing is performed. In addition, in order not to perform the hold announcement effect based on the reception of the special figure 1 start entering ball command in the high base state (NO in S4453), the advance determination (the special figure 1 advance determination) related to the special figure 1 hold is set to high. This is consistent with the above-described starting ball entry processing (S205), which is performed in the low base state without being performed in the base state.

  Next, in S4454, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is to be executed (S4454). This execution determination is performed based on whether or not a condition (execution condition) that enables the execution of the hold notice effect is satisfied. In the present embodiment, two conditions are provided as execution conditions of the hold announcement effect, and one of the conditions is that the reception of the current start entry command (start entry ball) does not occur during the suspension notice inhibition period. That is stipulated. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, in the high base state (low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state) after the big hit game ends, a predetermined period (after the big hit game ends) In this example, an effect mode (until the special symbol change display is performed a predetermined number of times) does not indicate whether the gaming state is the low-probability high-base state (time-saving game state) or the high-precision high-base state (probable change game state). In this effect mode (“effect mode C” in this example), the execution of the hold announcement effect is prohibited. In other words, the period in which the effect mode C after the big hit game is set is a suspension notice prohibition period. In addition, if a suspension notice production is performed for a special figure reservation that corresponds to a deviation fluctuation accompanied by a super-reach effect (also referred to as “departure super-reach fluctuation”), the deviation super-reach fluctuation that is the target of the reservation announcement production The execution of a new hold announcement effect is prohibited for a predetermined period from the start. In other words, the predetermined period after the end of the off-reach superfluctuation targeted for the hold announcement effect is a hold announcement prohibition period.

  Therefore, in S4454, first, it is determined whether or not the reception of the starting ball entry command (starting ball entry) is during the suspension notice prohibition period, that is, whether or not the reception is currently in the suspension notice prohibition period. I do. As a result, during the suspension notice prohibition period, it is determined that the execution condition of the suspension notice effect is not satisfied (unsatisfied) (NO in S4455), and the processing ends without performing the processing of S4456 and thereafter. In this case, the hold announcement effect based on the current ball entry will not be executed.

  Here, regarding the suspension notice prohibition period, the execution of the suspension notice production in the state non-notification mode (“production mode C” in this example) set after the end of the big hit game is prohibited for the player. In the situation where it is difficult (impossible) to grasp (determine) the current game state, the expectation is that the game may be in a relatively advantageous game state (in this example, a probable change game state), It is a game with tension that is mixed with anxiety that it may be in a relatively disadvantageous game state (in this example, a time reduction game state), so that such a game with tension is not impaired by the notice effect. To do that. In other words, for a while after the end of the big hit game, the hold announcement effect is not intentionally performed in order to concentrate the players on the game with a sense of tension in which it is difficult to determine the game state. Therefore, in S4454, as described above, the current production mode is specified by referring to the mode status. As a result, if the production mode is C (state non-notification mode), it is determined that the suspension notice prohibition period is currently in effect. The hold announcement effect is not executed (NO in S4455). In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is set to “C” (state non-notification mode), not only the suspended notice effect but also other notice effects are not executed (not generated).

  In addition, the reason for prohibiting the execution of the hold notice effect (setting the hold notice prohibition period) after the super-reach change that has become the target of the hold notice effect ends is as follows. In other words, in the variation display (variation production) of the production design 8 accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, various productions for increasing the player's expectation of the big hit can be executed. There is a reach production as. The reach effect is, for example, a state in which two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner. This is an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the big hit mode. The reach effects of the present embodiment are roughly classified into normal reach effects and super reach effects, and the latter is an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that of the former.

  In this embodiment, when a fluctuation display of a special symbol having a fluctuation time of 450000 ms or more is performed (see FIG. 9), a super-reach effect is executed in accordance with the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display is performed. There may be out-of-place fluctuations, and in some cases, jackpot fluctuations. If a super-reach production with a relatively long fluctuation time (producing time) is performed, but the super-reach production is due to a deviation and the deviation symbol is finally displayed, For the player, the disappointment is considered to be greater than in the case where the game is decided without a reach effect and in the case where the game is decided with a normal reach effect. Therefore, if a special announcement hold is performed for a special figure that corresponds to an out-of-control fluctuation that causes a super-reach effect to be performed (also referred to as “out-of-reach super-reach change”), the out-of-control effect is applied For a predetermined period after the end of the super reach fluctuation, execution of a new hold announcement effect is prohibited. In the event that the release is confirmed after the Super Reach production, players who have been excited by the pending announcement production will be more likely to be disappointed with the expectations of the reservation announcement production, and the interest in the reservation announcement production will decrease This is because there is a low possibility that a sufficient effect can be obtained even if a new pending notice effect is immediately executed in such a situation.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a subtraction-type counter (also referred to as a “restriction counter”) that counts the number of changes since the end of the off-limit super-reach change, which is the target of the hold announcement effect, is provided by the effect control microcomputer 91 ( Until the limit counter counts a predetermined number of times (until the count value becomes "0"), a holding notice prohibition period for prohibiting execution of a new holding notice effect is provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90). I have. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a predetermined value (predetermined number of times) to the limit counter in response to the setting of the execution pattern of the hold announcement effect for the out-of-reach super reach fluctuation (S4456 described later). In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the predetermined value to the limit counter, the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 8) is performed after the end of the super-reach variation that triggered the setting of the predetermined value. Each time it is received (for example, every time a fluctuation stop command is received), the value of the limit counter is decremented by one. Therefore, in S4454, by referring to the restriction counter, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice prohibition period is currently in progress. As a result, if the suspension notice prohibition period is in effect, the suspension notice effect is not executed. (NO in S4455).

  In this embodiment, the predetermined value (predetermined number of times) set in the limit counter is a value (variable value) corresponding to the fluctuation time of the deviation super-reach fluctuation. Specifically, in the low base state, when the variation time of the out-of-reach super reach variation is 45000 ms, it is set to “10”, and when it is 75000 ms, it is set to “20”. In addition, in the high base state, when the variation time of the off-reach super reach variation is 45000 ms, it is set to “5”, and when it is 75000 ms, it is set to “10”. For this reason, in the low base state, when the fluctuation time of the off-limit super reach fluctuation targeted for the hold announcement effect is 45000 ms, after the fluctuation is completed, the fluctuation display is newly performed for at least 10 times. If the hold announcement effect is not performed and the time is 75000 ms, after the change ends, the hold announcement effect is not performed for at least 20 times of the fluctuation display. In addition, in the high base state, when the fluctuation time of the off-reach reach fluctuation targeted for the suspension notice production is 45000 ms, after the fluctuation is completed, the suspension is newly suspended for at least five times of the fluctuation display. If the announcement effect is not performed and the time is 75000 ms, after the change is completed, the reserved announcement effect is not performed while at least 10 times of the fluctuation display are performed.

  Here, the value to be set in the limit counter (the number of times of fluctuation after super-reach reach) differs depending on the length of the fluctuation time, because a fluctuation effect with a longer fluctuation time (production time) has a higher hitting reliability. This is because it is generally considered that if the jackpot reliability is determined to be deviated by a fluctuation effect having a higher reliability, the discouragement given to the player becomes larger. In addition, the value set in the limit counter (the number of fluctuations after the super-reach is out) differs depending on the game state (low base state, high base state) because the high base state has a fluctuation display compared to the low base state. Is executed more frequently, and the pace of holding the special map is faster.

  Note that the determination of the type of the variation pattern (variation time) related to the suspension of the special figure when setting the limit counter is based on information indicating the random number value of the variation pattern included in the starting ball entry command from the main control board 80 (starting ball entry). (A value of the fluctuation pattern random number acquired at that time). In addition, the value set in the limit counter (the length of the suspension notice prohibition period) is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment, but can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the suspension notice prohibition period can be determined based on conditions suitable for setting the period, such as elapse of time or the number of executions of the predetermined effect, in addition to the number of times the special symbol (effect symbol) changes. Further, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the suspension notice prohibition period (when the limit counter> 0), the limit counter is cleared to zero (initialization) upon execution of the big hit game related to the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4454 that the current time is not during the suspension notice prohibition period, then in S4454, a lottery for performing the suspension notice effect is performed. That is, as the execution condition of the hold announcement effect, in addition to the fact that it is not during the hold advance announcement prohibition period (first condition), winning in the execution lottery of the hold announcement effect (second condition) is defined. In the present embodiment, as a random number for effect determination, a random number for hold notice effect execution determination is provided, the random number is obtained in S4454, and the obtained random number value is determined based on a lottery table (not shown). An execution lottery (random number lottery) of the hold announcement effect is performed. The lottery table (not shown) used in the lottery depends on, for example, the success / failure information (big hit or miss) and the fluctuation pattern information (length of fluctuation time) for a new special figure hold triggered by the current ball entry. (That is, according to the result of the preliminary determination), the feasibility of the hold announcement effect, that is, the winning probability is determined to be different. Specifically, for example, when the newly generated (stored) special map reservation is a reservation related to a 16R jackpot (a 16R jackpot reservation), compared to a case where a 6R jackpot or a detachment is held, It is determined so that the execution possibility of the hold notice effect is increased. If the newly generated (stored) special figure reservation is a suspension related to a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 45000 ms or more), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, It is determined so that the possibility of executing the hold announcement effect is higher than that in the case of hold related to (30000 ms or less).

  Then, when the lottery for the execution of the hold announcement effect is lost, it is determined that the execution condition of the hold advance effect is not satisfied (not established) (NO in S4455), and the process ends without performing the processes in and after S4456. In this case, the hold announcement effect based on the current ball entry is not executed (started). On the other hand, if the lottery of the hold announcement effect is won, it means that all the execution conditions of the hold advance effect are satisfied. In this case, it is assumed that the execution condition of the hold advance effect is satisfied (YES in S4455). The execution pattern (holding notice effect pattern) of the hold notice effect is determined (selected) and set (S4456).

  Note that the special figure hold that satisfies the execution conditions of the hold notice production and that triggers the execution of the hold notice production is also referred to as “notice target hold”, and the acquisition information related to the notice target hold is “notice target acquisition information”. Also called. Also, the above-described execution conditions of the hold announcement effect are merely examples, and it is of course possible to set conditions other than the above-described conditions, and the number (type) of conditions is arbitrary. Further, it is also possible to change execution conditions of the hold announcement effect depending on the game state (low base state, high base state, etc.).

  The determination (selection) and setting of the execution pattern (holding notice effect pattern) of the hold notice effect in S4456 are performed by using the hold notice effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. Perform based on. The random number for determining a pending announcement effect is a kind of the random number for determining an announcement effect described above, and takes a value in a range of “0 to 99” in the present embodiment. If the current game state is the low base state (YES in S4451) and the start ball entry command received this time is the special figure 1 start ball input command (YES in S4452), the special figure 1 hold announcement effect shown in FIG. The execution pattern of the special figure 1 suspension announcement effect is determined (selected) by using (refer to) any one of the pattern determination tables A to C. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the high base state (NO in S4451) and the start incoming ball command received this time is the special figure 2 start incoming ball command (YES in S4453), the special figure 2 hold shown in FIG. 49 is held. The execution pattern of the special figure 2 suspension announcement effect is determined (selected) using (with reference to) any of the announcement effect pattern determination tables A to D.

  As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, a special figure 1 suspension notice effect pattern determination table (also simply referred to as “special figure 1 suspension notice effect table”) and a special figure 2 suspension notice effect pattern determination table (simply referred to as “special figure 2 suspension The advance notice table is also common in that both have tables A to C, and the special figure 2 reservation advance notice table has a table D that does not exist in the special figure 1 reservation advance notice table. ing. Each of these tables can be specified based on the starting ball entry command received in the previous step S4390 or the effect holding information stored in the previous step S4395 (that is, the result of the preliminary determination) (“result of special symbol hit / fail judgment”). The data structure is such that a random number value (0-99) for holding an advance notice effect is assigned to any of a plurality of selectable advance notice effect patterns for each of "miss, hit" and "reach in case of miss". ing.

  In addition, the data structure of the special figure 1 hold notice table A to C shown in FIG. 48 and the special figure 2 hold notice table A to C shown in FIG. And the sort ratio (number of assigned random numbers) of the random numbers for holding advance notice effect determination are the same. On the other hand, with respect to the special notice 2 reservation notice table D shown in FIG. 49, other reservation notice effect patterns which are not selected in the other reservation notice tables can be selected (to be selected). In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, "-" indicates that a random value is not assigned, and this portion is not selected (is not selected) (the same applies hereinafter).

  More specifically, the types of the special figure 1 reservation notice effect patterns (also referred to as “special figure 1 reservation notice type”) that can be selected in the special figure 1 reservation notice table are roughly classified into special figure 1 reservation notice types A to C. Are divided into three types. The special figure 1 reservation notice type A is configured by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 1 reservation notice table A shown in FIG. 48 (a), and in this embodiment, is defined by “patterns A1 to A4”. Be composed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold notice type B is configured by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 1 hold notice table B shown in FIG. 48B, and in this embodiment, “patterns B1 to B4 It is constituted by. Further, the special figure 1 hold notice type C is configured by a hold notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 1 hold notice table C shown in FIG. 48C, and in the present embodiment, “patterns C1 to C7” It is constituted by.

  On the other hand, the types of the special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement effect patterns that can be selected in the special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement table (also referred to as “special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement type”) are roughly classified into four types of special figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement types A to D. Divided into types. The special notice 2 reservation notice type A is constituted by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special notice 2 reservation notice table A shown in FIG. 49 (a), and in this embodiment, is defined by “patterns A1 to A4”. Be composed. In addition, the special figure 2 reservation notice type B is configured by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table B shown in FIG. 49B, and in this embodiment, “patterns B1 to B4 It is constituted by. Further, the special figure 2 reservation notice type C is configured by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special figure 2 reservation notice table C shown in FIG. 49 (c). In the present embodiment, the patterns “C1 to C7” are used. It is constituted by. In addition, the special notice 2 reservation notice type D is configured by a reservation notice effect pattern that can be selected based on the special notice 2 reservation notice table D shown in FIG. 49D, and in the present embodiment, “patterns D1 to D5” It is constituted by.

  At the time of execution of the special figure 1 reservation notice production (YES at S4452 → S4454 → YES at S4455), at S4456, one of the special figure 1 reservation notice tables A to C shown in FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (c) is set. Then, based on the set table and the random number value for holding advance announcement effect determination acquired in S4456, one special figure 1 hold advance announcement effect pattern is selected and set (S4456). Which of the special figure 1 reservation notice tables A to C is to be set (used) depends on whether the number of special figure 1 reservation balls after increasing by one with the occurrence of the first starting ball is "1" or "2". It depends on whether it is above. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "1", the special figure 1 reserved advance notice table A is set, and if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "2" or more, the special figure 1 reserved preliminary notice table B or C is set. set. Therefore, when the number of reserved special figure 1 holding balls becomes “1” by the first starting ball, and the special special drawing 1 reserved announcement effect is performed accordingly, the reserved advanced announcement effect pattern is any one of “patterns A1 to A4”. It becomes one pattern (S4456). On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figure 1 reservation balls becomes “2” or more due to the first starting ball, and the special preliminary notice production effect is performed accordingly, the reserved preliminary production effect patterns are “pattern B1 to B4” and “pattern C1”. To C7 ”(S4456).

  Here, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “2” or more, which one of the special figure 1 reserved notice tables B and C is set (used) is determined, for example, by the sub control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer). It is possible to determine by random number lottery using the table selection random number generated in 91) or to determine in a predetermined order of use (alternate, alternate every predetermined number of times, etc.). In this example, it is determined by random number lottery Shall do.

  Also, when executing the special figure 2 suspension notice (YES in S4453 → S4454 → YES in S4455), in S4456, any of the special figure 2 suspension notice tables A to D shown in FIGS. Based on the set table and the random number value for holding advance notice effect determination acquired in S4456, one special figure 2 hold advance effect pattern is selected and set (S4456). Which of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to D is to be set (used) depends on whether the number of special figure 2 reservation balls after increasing by one with the occurrence of the second starting ball is "1" or "2". It depends on whether it is above. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1", the special figure 2 reserved notice table A or D is set. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "2" or more, the special figure 2 reserved notice table B to Set any of D. Therefore, the special figure 2 reserved ball number becomes “1” due to the second starting ball, and when the special figure 2 reserved notice effect is performed accordingly, the reserved notice effect patterns are “patterns A1 to A4” and “patterns D1 to D1”. D5 ”(S4456). On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls becomes “2” or more due to the second starting ball, and the special preliminary figure 2 reservation preliminary announcement effect is performed accordingly, the reservation preliminary announcement production patterns are “pattern B1 to B4” and “pattern C1”. To C7 "and one of the patterns D1 to D5 (S4456).

  Here, when the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1”, which of the special figure 2 reserved notice tables A and D is set (used), or when the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “2” or more. In some cases, which of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables B to D is to be set (used) is determined by, for example, a random number lottery using a table selection random number generated by the sub control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Or it can be determined according to a predetermined order of use (alternate, replacement every predetermined number of times, etc.), and in this example, it is determined by random number lottery.

  Next, in S4457, a hold announcement effect command instructing execution of the hold announcement effect pattern set in S4456 is set in the sub output buffer (S4457). When the hold notice effect command set in S4457 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 sets the hold notice effect pattern specified based on the received hold notice effect command, That is, the image data (holding effect image data, etc.) for the hold advance effect corresponding to the hold advance effect pattern set in S4456 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the hold advance effect (hold change) based on the read image data. (Notification) is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (effect holding display area, variable holding display area) in accordance with the hold announcement effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (special symbol) (for example, when the variable effect start command is issued) until the notification target hold that has triggered the execution (start) of the hold advance effect is exhausted. The display control of the production suspension, such as moving the display position of the production suspension or changing the display mode of the production suspension for each reception), is executed in accordance with the reservation notice production pattern. The content of the hold announcement effect performed on the display screen 7a will be described later.

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start processing (S4402) executed in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the variable effect start processing (S4402), first, an effect determining random number process for acquiring various effect determining random numbers such as a variable effect determining random number, a preview effect determining random number, and an effect design determining random number. (S4501). In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the change start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Based on the obtained value (acquired information), the mode of an effect symbol game effect to be executed (variable effect), the mode of a notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. As a result, symbol information for designating the jackpot type is included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are commands corresponding to the first special symbol and commands corresponding to the second special symbol, the variation pattern designation command is analyzed to analyze the variation pattern designation command, so that the effect pattern game effect to be started this time is started. It is possible to determine whether the (display of the variation of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the fluctuation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

  When the received change start command includes the above-mentioned “state change command”, it means that information (game state change information) indicating that the game state has changed is included. Here, as described above, the state change command changes (changes) the game state from the high base state (highly accurate high base state, low accurate high base state) to the low base state (low accurate low base state in this example). The main control is performed at the timing when the next variable display is started after the special symbol variable display (for example, the 100th variable display in the time-saving gaming state) which triggers the end of the high base state. This is transmitted from the unit 80. Therefore, as a result of the analysis of the fluctuation start command by S4502, the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be started this time (the fluctuation display of the effect symbol) is changed to the high base state depending on whether or not the fluctuation state command includes the game state change information. It is possible to determine whether or not the display corresponds to the first variable display after shifting to the low base state. As a result, in the case of the first variable display after shifting to the low base state, in S4507 to be described later, a command for specifying the display of the left-turn instruction image (left-turn instruction image display command) is changed. The left-handed instruction flag (not shown) is turned ON in order to set in the sub output buffer.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is one of values from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status “1” corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status “2” corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status “3” corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status “4”. The mode status corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. The current production mode can be specified by referring to the current mode status.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of the effect on the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect contents (effect mode) of the game effect such as a notice effect or a reach effect are different. Is done. Specifically, an effect image displayed on the image display device 7 is produced, for example, a display mode of the effect design 8 (for example, a pattern design, a number design, or the like) is different, or a character, an item, and a background image appearing are different. It depends on the mode. In addition, the production design game production and the big hit game production can also be executed in a mode according to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (announcement production, reach production, round production etc.) are provided, production production mode , Different game effects can be executed.

  In this embodiment, the effect mode A and the effect mode B are effect modes corresponding to the low-accuracy low-base state, and the effect mode C is an effect mode corresponding to both the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state. The effect mode D is an effect mode corresponding to the low-probability high base state, and the effect mode E is an effect mode corresponding to the high-accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is other than “C” (any one of “A”, “B”, “D”, and “E”), the player confirms the effect mode and the current gaming state is low. It is possible to know which of the certainty low base state, the low certainty high base state (time saving game state) and the high certainty high base state (probable change game state). On the other hand, when the effect mode is “C”, even if the player confirms the effect mode, whether the current game state is the low-accuracy high-base state (time-saving game state) or the high-accuracy high-base state (probable change game state) ) Is difficult (impossible) to determine (determine) In this sense, the effect mode C can be said to be a “state non-notification mode”.

  In the present embodiment, in the high base state (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state) after the big hit game is completed, the effect mode is initially set to the effect mode C, and thereafter, a predetermined number of special symbol change displays are performed. When performed, the effect mode is switched from effect mode C to effect mode D or E. Details of such effect mode switching will be described later. In addition, the production mode A and the production mode B are also called “normal production mode”, the production mode C is also called “special production mode” or “first production mode”, and the production mode D is “time reduction production”. Mode and the second production mode, and the production mode E is also called the “probable variation production mode” and the “third production mode”.

  Next, in S4504, a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for setting a variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern) using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member, and the like is set (S4504). Specifically, a variable effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is “P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation effect pattern determination table may be used as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table when a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. A fluctuation effect pattern determination table is set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the change mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and includes a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode statuses) corresponding to the effect modes (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random number for variation determination determined in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the designated variation pattern is selected and set (S4505). . As the fluctuating effect pattern, a fluctuating mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (an effect symbol game effect performing mode) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect (fluctuating effect), when performing a reach effect (reach effect effect game effect) or when performing a character effect using a specific character (character effect design game effect), A case where a reach effect or a character effect is not executed (a non-reach effect design game effect) or the like is determined.

  Here, the reach production is also referred to as “specific production”. The effect design game effect (fluctuation effect) for executing the reach effect is also referred to as “reach change” or “reach change effect”, and the effect pattern game effect (variable effect) for performing the character effect is referred to as “character change”. , Or "character fluctuation effect", and a design symbol game effect (variation effect) that does not execute a reach effect or a character effect is also referred to as "normal fluctuation effect" or "normal fluctuation effect".

  In S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), and set. The effect symbol 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is a result of the special symbol right / wrong determination, which is out of the range. In the case of the presence or absence of the reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols, and at least one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is out of reach without any reach. It is said that the staging pattern is different. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit and the big hit is the 16R first big hit in the low-probability low-base state, it is determined to be "777" and the 6R big hit in the low-probability low-base state ( In the case of the 6R second big hit and the 6R third big hit, a slot other than "777" is set, and the 16R big hit (16R fourth big hit, 16R) in the high base state (low-precision high base state, high-precision high base state) In the case of (fifth big hit), any one of “111” to “999” is selected. That is, except for the case where the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed with the “777” slot in the low-probability low-base state, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is “probable variable hit” from the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8. It is impossible to grasp. Note that the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 shown in the present embodiment is an example, and what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol when a big hit occurs can be changed as appropriate.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, super Reach C, character effects, and the like are set, and in S4505, it is determined based on the variable effect pattern determination table which of these effects is to be performed or whether these effects are not to be performed. Then, when the reach effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect (any of SP reach A to C) is executed as the effect symbol game effect, compared to the case where the normal reach effect (any of reach A to C) is executed, It is set to increase the possibility of a big hit. In other words, it can be said that the super-reach effect is a game effect having a higher jackpot expectation (small hit reliability) than the normal reach effect. The super reach production is also referred to as “special special production” or “special production display”. Further, in the present embodiment, the reach effects are provided with six types of reach A, reach B, reach C, SP reach A, SP reach B and SP reach C, but more reach effects than in this embodiment are provided. It is also possible to provide them, or it is also possible to reduce (reduce) the number (type) of reach effects from this embodiment.

  Of the reach effects of the present embodiment, the normal reach effects (reach A to C) are set (executed) when a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms or more (see FIG. 9) is received. The super reach effect (SP reach A to C) is set (executed) when a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 450,000 ms or more (see FIG. 9) is received. It is gaining.

  Here, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is basically performed as follows. That is, after the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing display, the fluctuation speed of all effect symbols becomes substantially constant at a high speed, and thereafter, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the first stop symbol (in this example, the first stop symbol). The fluctuation speed of the left effect symbol 8L) decreases, and the first stop symbol stops (temporary stop). Following this, the fluctuation speed of the second stop symbol (the right effect symbol 8R in this example) decreases, and the second stop symbol stops (temporary stop), and finally, the third stop symbol (the middle effect symbol 8C in this example). And the third stop symbol stops (temporary stop). Thereafter, when the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, and one variable display ends with this. Normal fluctuation effects, reach effects, and the like are performed based on the flow from the start to the end of such fluctuation display.

  Specifically, for example, in a case where the special symbol fluctuating time reducing function according to the number of special figure reserved balls or the game state is not operating (when the fluctuating time reducing function is not operating), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Starts the fluctuation display, the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) stops (temporarily stops) at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and subsequently, the right effect symbol 8R (2nd stop symbol) stops (temporary stop). At this time, if the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the symbol of the same number and reach is established, it develops to reach effect, and if reach is not established (that is, normal fluctuation), the right effect symbol 8R Following the stop (temporary stop) of the (second stop symbol), the medium effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) stops (temporary stop).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the normal fluctuation when the fluctuation time reducing function of the special symbol is not activated (that is, in the low base state), the third stop symbol (in this example, the medium effect symbol 8C) starts from the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol 8. The time required to stop (temporary stop) is 11 seconds. On the other hand, in the normal fluctuation when the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated (that is, in the high base state), the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) is stopped (temporarily stopped) from the start of the fluctuation display. The time required until the normal effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) and the medium effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) are stopped (temporarily). The time it takes to stop) is also shorter. In the reach fluctuation, after the reach is established, the time required for the medium effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) to end the fluctuation display and for the effect symbol 8 to be determined and stopped depends on the reach type such as the normal reach and SP reach described above. The SP reach is longer than the normal reach. The time from the establishment of the reach to the confirmation stop depends on the total fluctuation time of the effect symbol 8, that is, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 9).

  Next, in S4506, a process related to the setting of the notice effect (notice effect setting process) is performed (S4506). In the present embodiment, there are various kinds of information, such as a notice effect (hold-ahead notice) based on the effect hold information (preliminary determination result) stored in S4395, a notice effect (the change notice) related to the current special figure change display (a change effect), and the like. In S4506, it is determined whether or not each of the preview effects is to be performed during the variable effect (whether or not to perform the notification effect). Or a notice production pattern). Specifically, based on the announcement effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the announcement effect determination table stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the announcement effect pattern are determined. A notice effect pattern is set based on the result.

  In addition, as a notice effect (also referred to as “change notice effect”) that can be executed along with the change effect, for example, a background notice displaying a background image for the notice on the display screen 7a, and a plurality of notice images are stepwisely displayed. , A comment notice for displaying a comment image for the notice, a movable accessory notice for operating the movable decorative member, and the like. In addition, the storage contents of the production suspension information stored in S4395 (the storage contents of the production suspension information storage area) and the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in S4502 (the current special figure fluctuation) The announcement effect pattern set in S4506 based on the fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol (the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol according to the current special figure fluctuation display) also specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command). That is, the type (announcement type) and mode of the notice effect to be executed, the presence or absence of the notice effect, and the like are different. Furthermore, when performing a notice effect during a variable effect, one notice effect (one kind of notice effect) may be performed, or two or more notice effects (a plurality of notice effects) among a plurality of notice effects. In other words, a plurality of types of announcement effects may be performed at each execution timing during one variable display (during a variable effect).

  In the present embodiment, the mode status is referred to in S4503 described above. If the mode status is “3”, the effect mode is currently “C” and it is during the above-mentioned suspension notice prohibition period. Become. As described above, during the suspension notice prohibition period, the suspension notice effect is not executed. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is set to “C”, the process of S4506, that is, the process related to the setting of the notice effect (variable time notice effect) to be executed during the fluctuation effect is not performed. I have to do that. Specifically, at the time of executing the process of S4506, first, it is determined whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (mode status = “3”). Is not performed, and if the mode is not the effect mode C, the process of S4506 relating to the setting of the announcement effect is performed. As a result, during the setting period of the effect mode C (during the hold notice prohibition period), no notice effect including the hold notice effect is executed.

  Next, in S4507, based on the fluctuating effect pattern set in S4505 and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 (the notice effect pattern is set only in the effect mode other than the effect mode C), the effect design game effect (variable effect, notice effect) The variable effect start command for starting the effect, etc.) is set in the sub output buffer (S4507), and the variable effect start processing ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 sets the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, ie, S4505. Predetermined fluctuation effect image data (image data indicating the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, fluctuation stop, etc. of the effect symbol 8) corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern set in the above, and a notice effect pattern specified based on the fluctuation effect start command That is, predetermined notice effect image data corresponding to the notice effect pattern set in S4506 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the fluctuation effect, the notice effect, and the like based on the read image data are displayed on the image display device 7. It is executed on the screen 7a. In addition, a fluctuation display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

  In S4507, it is determined whether or not the left-turn instruction flag is ON. If the flag is ON, the left-turn instruction image display command is included in the fluctuation effect start command and set in the sub output buffer. Here, as a result of analyzing the change start command in the above-described S4502, the left strike instruction flag indicates that the game start state includes the game state change information, that is, the game state is the high base state (the right strike game state). This is a flag that is turned ON when the state transitions (changes) from the low state to the low base state (left-handed gaming state). When the left-handed instruction image display command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006) together with the variable effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 converts the image data for the variable effect and the image data for the advance effect to the aforementioned image data. In addition, the image data for left-handed instruction notification is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a fluctuation effect, a notice effect, a left-handed instruction notification, and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. I do. Further, with the execution (start) of the left-handed instruction notification, the right-handed instruction image 71 (see FIG. 52 (b)) displayed in the high base state up to that point is deleted from the display screen 7a.

  The left-handed instruction flag turned ON based on the result of the analysis of the change start command in S4502 is set by setting a left-handed instruction image display command (change start command) in the sub output buffer, or It is turned off based on transmitting a display command (change start command) to the image control board 100. At the same time, the effect control microcomputer 91 turns off a right-handed display flag described later.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the left-handed instruction notification performed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) of the present embodiment is displayed in the left-handed display area 70c provided on the display screen 7a. This is performed by displaying a left-hitting instruction image 70 instructing to launch a game ball toward the area 3A. The left-handed instruction image 70 is composed of a left-handed character image 70a representing the character "Please return to left-handed" and three left arrow images 70b located above the left-handed character image 70a. In the present embodiment, the left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (left-handed display area) when the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state and the first effect symbol 8 starts to change. 70c). This allows the player who previously performed a game (symbol variation game) by right-handing in the high base state to perform left-handing (return to left-handing) with the shift to the low base state. It has been actively encouraged. After the left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed on the display screen 7a (left-handed display area 70c), it is deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (the left-handed instruction notification ends).

[Right-hand instruction image display processing]
Next, the right-handed instruction image display processing (S4600) executed as one of the big hit game-related effect processing (S4406) in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the right-handed instruction image display processing (S4600), first, it is determined whether the right-handed display flag is OFF (S4601). Here, the right-handed display flag is a flag for indicating (determining) whether or not the right-handed instruction image 71 is being displayed on the display screen 7a (right-handed display area 71c) of the image display device 7. , OFF indicates that it is not displayed, and ON indicates that it is being displayed. If it is determined in S4601 that the right-handed display flag is not OFF (NO in S4601), that is, if the right-handed display flag is ON, the right-handed instruction image 71 is being displayed, so the processing in S4602 and thereafter is performed. This processing is ended without performing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4601 that the right-handed display flag is OFF (YES in S4601), it is determined whether the big hit game-related command received in S4405 is a 1R start command (S4602). The jackpot game-related effect processing (S4406) is executed upon receiving the jackpot game-related command (YES in S4405) as described above. Therefore, in S4602, the jackpot game-related command which is the execution trigger of the processing in S4406 Is a 1R start command. As a result, if the received command is not the 1R start command (NO in S4602), the process ends without performing the processes in S4603 and thereafter.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4602 that the command is a 1R start command (YES in S4602), a right-handed instruction image display start command is set in the sub output buffer (S4603), and a right-handed display flag is turned on (S4604). This processing ends. The right-handed instruction image display start command set in S4603 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the 1R start effect command set in the sub output buffer in the process of S4406 based on the reception of the 1R start command. Is done. As a result, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 52A, a round effect display is performed on substantially the entire screen, and the current round number is displayed in the round number display area 72a provided at the upper left of the screen. Is displayed, and a right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in a right-handed display area 71c provided at the upper right of the screen. Here, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the right-handed instruction image 71 of the present embodiment includes a right-handed character image 71a representing a character “right-handed” and a lower right-handed character image 71a. And one right arrow image 71b located at The right-handed instruction image 71 has a smaller display size than the moving image display of the right hitting instruction notification for the first hit and the left-handed instruction image 70 described above.

  In addition, the right-handed instruction image 71 of the present embodiment is displayed right after the start of the first round of the big hit game by the processing of S4602 and S4603 described above, and then turned right in the processing of S4604. The display is continued until the display flag is turned off. As described above, while the special symbol variation display is performed in the high base state as described above, the special symbol variation display of the number of times that the high base state ends is performed (for example, in the time-saving game state). This is turned off at the timing when the gaming state is changed to the low base state (low-precision low base state) and the first special symbol fluctuation display is started. Therefore, the display of the right-handing instruction image 71 (the right-handing instruction notification by the image display device 7) in the present embodiment is performed after the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit, and thereafter, the high base state is a predetermined number of times. Until the processing is terminated based on the execution of the symbol variation display, the display is performed in the right-handed display area 71c on the display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit game is a positive variable gaming state if the big hit is a positive variable big hit, and a time saving gaming state if the non-probable variable big hit (normal big hit). Is always in the high base state. Therefore, after the initial hit, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 (the right-handed instruction notification by the image display device 7) is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c until the high base state ends without a large hit occurring in the high base state. Is performed continuously.

  Specifically, when display of the right-handed instruction image 71 is started in the right-handed display area 71c with the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit (see FIG. 52 (a)), The display of the right strike instruction image 71 is continued even in the high base state (highly accurate high base state or low accurate high base state) after the big hit game (see FIG. 52 (b)). Thereafter, for example, when a big hit (that is, “ren-chan”) occurs in the high base state, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 continuing from the first round related to the first hit is a fanfare effect of the jackpot game related to the consecutive-chan. , The round effect and the ending effect are also executed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and are also continued in the subsequent high base state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state). In addition, when the end condition of the high base state is satisfied without the occurrence of the big hit in the high base state, for example, the high base state is a time-saving gaming state (low-precision high-base state) and the special time-saving gaming state When the symbol change display is performed 100 times (see S1909 and S1910 in FIG. 31), the display of the right-hand instruction image 71 ends with the start of the next change display (the right-hand instruction image 71 is deleted). ), A left-handed instruction image 70 is displayed in the left-handed display area 70c (left-handed instruction notification by the image display device 7) (see FIG. 52 (c)).

[Effect mode setting process at the end of big hit]
Next, the jackpot end effect mode setting process (S4700) executed as one process of the jackpot game-related effect process (S4406) in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the big hit end effect mode setting process (S4700), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game-related command received in the previous S4405 is an ending command (S4701). If it is (NO in S4701), the process is terminated without performing the processes in S4702 and thereafter, and if it is an ending command (YES in S4701), the process proceeds to S4702. As described above, the ending command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 80 at the end of the big hit game. Therefore, the reception of the ending command is the end timing of the big hit game. Therefore, the process of S4701 is for determining whether or not it is time to end the big hit game.

  Next, in S4702, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game ended this time is a jackpot game relating to a probable big hit (S4702). In this embodiment, as the ending command, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is provided, and at the end of the jackpot game, the main control unit 80 (the game control microcomputer 81) sets the type of the jackpot related to the jackpot game to be ended. Is transmitted (output) to the sub-control unit 90. Therefore, in S4702, the type of the jackpot that has been completed this time (here, the probable variable hit or the non-probable variable hit) is determined based on the received ending command. As a result, if it is a probability change big hit (YES in S4702), the game state after the current big hit game ends is a high probability and high base state (probability change game state). In step S4703, the high probability flag for enabling discrimination is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S4704. On the other hand, if the finished big hit is not a probability variable big hit (NO in S4702), that is, if it is a non-probable variable big hit, the game state after the current big hit game ends is a low-probability high base state (hour-saving game state). Therefore, the process proceeds to S4704 without performing the process of S4703 (without turning on the high probability flag).

  Next, in S4704, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time is a big hit game related to “16R first big hit” (S4704). This determination can be made based on the received ending command, as in S4702. Here, in the present embodiment, among the jackpots according to the first special symbol, there is only one type of "16R jackpot" for the 16R jackpot, and the jackpot is a probable variable jackpot (see FIG. 6). Then, in the case of the 16R first big hit, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode of “777”. On the other hand, the 6R jackpot, which is the jackpot according to the first special symbol, and the 16R jackpot, which is the jackpot according to the second special symbol, have a probable variable hit and a non-probable variable hit (6R second, third and 16R fourth and fourth, respectively). There are 5 big hits (see FIG. 6). Of these big hits, for 6R big hits, the effect design 8 is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (zolo) other than "777", and for 16R big hits, "111" to "999" Is stopped and displayed in any of the big hit modes. For this reason, for example, in the low-probability low base state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is 16R first big hit, and the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. When the 16R big hit game is performed, it becomes clear to the player from the big hit mode of the effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed that the big hit is a probability variable big hit. On the other hand, even if it is a jackpot other than the 16R first jackpot and the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, and the 6R jackpot game or the 16R jackpot game is performed, the displayed effect is stopped for the player. It is difficult (impossible) to determine whether or not the jackpot is a probable big hit only with the jackpot mode of the symbol 8 or the executed jackpot game mode.

  If it is determined in S4704 that the jackpot that has been completed this time is the 16R first jackpot (YES in S4704), the mode status is set to “5” (S4705). As described above, the mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. Therefore, by setting the mode status to “5” in S4705, the effect mode when the game state shifts to the game state in which the special symbol change display (effect display 8 change display) can be executed following the end of the big hit game Becomes “E”. Since the effect mode E corresponds to the high-probability high base state, the effect mode after the big hit game in this case is in accordance with the original game state. When the mode status is set to "5" in S4705, an effect mode E designation command for designating the effect mode E is set in the sub output buffer (S4706), and the process ends.

  The effect mode E designation command set in S4706 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006) together with the ending effect command set in the sub output buffer based on the reception of the ending command (S4405). In response, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data for the ending effect and the image data for the effect mode E (background image data in this example) from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the image data on the image display device 7. After performing an ending effect based on the read image data on the screen 7a, a background corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), a background (also referred to as “red background”) drawn based on red is displayed as the background of the display screen 7a corresponding to the effect mode E. The red background corresponds to the high-probability high base state, and a character indicating that the current gaming state is the high-probability high base state (probable changing game state) (in this example, the character of “probable changing”) is displayed. This is the background for state notification that is also displayed. Although illustration of the specific contents of the background is omitted in FIG. 53, the contents of the background can be arbitrarily determined, for example, as a background image corresponding to a model motif.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4704 that the jackpot ended this time is not the 16R first jackpot (NO in S4704), the mode status is set to "3" (S4707). As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode status “3” corresponds to the effect mode C. Therefore, by setting the mode status to “3”, the initial effect mode at the time of transition to the game state in which the change display of the special symbol (the change display of the effect symbol 8) can be executed following the end of the big hit game is It becomes "C". When the mode status is set in S4707, "20" is set in the first mode counter (S4708), and a production mode C designation command for designating the production mode C is set in the sub output buffer (S4709). Finish.

  Here, the first mode counter is for determining the set period of the effect mode C (first effect mode) after the big hit game, and is provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). I have. In this embodiment, the first mode counter is a subtraction type counter capable of counting the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated since the end of the big hit game, and the effect is produced until the value of the first mode counter becomes “0”. The mode C is set (the effect mode C setting period). In the effect mode C after the big hit game, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the first mode counter every time when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 8) is performed (for example, every time the fluctuation stop command is received). The value is subtracted by one. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit game ends, the effect mode is “C” while the special symbol change display is performed 20 times (from the first to the 20th change after the big hit game). Note that if a big hit occurs during the set period of the effect mode C after the big hit game (before the value of the first mode counter becomes zero), that is, the effect mode is changed to “C” by the effect mode transition process (S4800) described later. If a big hit occurs before changing (shifting) from "" to "D" or "E", the first mode counter is cleared to zero (initialized).

  The effect mode C designation command set in S4709 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the ending effect command set in the sub output buffer based on the reception of the ending command (S4405). . In response to this, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image data for the ending effect and the image data for the effect mode C (background image data in this example) from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the image data on the image display device 7. After performing an ending effect on the screen 7a based on the read image data, a background corresponding to the effect mode C is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a background (also referred to as a “green background”) drawn based on green is displayed as the background of the display screen 7a corresponding to the effect mode C. This green background corresponds to both the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, and is a background for state non-reporting without specifying the current game state.

[Direction mode transition processing]
Next, the effect mode transition process (S4800) executed in the variable effect start process (S4402) when the variable start command is received in the received command analysis process (S4302) (YES in S4401) will be described. The production mode transition processing (S4800) is processing related to the control of the production mode in the high base state (the low-precision high base state or the high-precision high base state), and refers to the mode status in S4503 of the variable production start processing (S4402). This is executed in conjunction with the operation.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the effect mode transition process (S4800), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect to be started is a deviation fluctuation (S4801). This determination can be made based on the analysis result of the change start command in the processing of S4502. As a result, if it is determined that the variation is not a deviation variation (NO in S4801), that is, if the variation effect to be started is a big hit variation, the process ends without performing the processes of S4802 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is out of order (YES in S4801), it is determined whether or not the current mode status is “3”, that is, whether or not the current production mode is “C” (S4802). ). As described above, the initial effect mode after the big hit game is set to the effect mode C by the above-described processing of S4704. Therefore, in S4802, it is determined whether or not the effect mode C is being set during the end of the big hit game. Is determined.

  If it is determined in S4802 that the current mode status is "3" (YES in S4802), that is, if the current effect mode is "C", whether the value of the first mode counter is zero or not Is determined (S4803), and if it is not zero (NO in S4803), the process ends without performing the processes in S4804 and thereafter. In this case, the effect mode is still “C”. On the other hand, when the value of the first mode counter is zero (YES in S4803), that is, in the effect mode C after the big hit game, the special symbol change display is performed 20 times, and the subsequent 21st special symbol change is performed. If it is the display start timing, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is ON (S4804). If it is ON (YES in S4804), the effect mode is shifted (switched) from “C” to “D”. ) Is determined (S4805).

  Here, if it is determined in S4804 that the high probability flag is ON, the current gaming state is a high-precision high base state, but the effect mode D corresponds to the low-precision high base state as described above. Therefore, when the effect mode is shifted from "C" to "D", the effect mode is shifted (switched) to an effect mode different from the original gaming state. In the present embodiment, such a transition process (switching process) to an effect mode different from the original gaming state, that is, the low probability and high base state is intentionally supported despite the fact that the game is originally in the high probability and high base state. The processing for shifting to the effect mode (effect mode D in this example) is performed when it is determined in S4805 that a predetermined shift condition (switching condition) is satisfied. Specifically, as transition conditions (switching conditions), (1) that three or more consecutive deviation fluctuations are secured as special figure fluctuations following the current deviation fluctuation, and (2) the transition lottery There are two conditions for winning.

  Among the transition conditions described above, (1) the fact that three or more consecutive fluctuations are ensured is determined, for example, by holding the second special symbol to be the main fluctuation display in the high base state (see FIG. 2). (Reserved) is stored three or more (special figure 2 reserved ball number ≧ 3), of which at least the first (oldest) stored special figure 2 reserved and the two following If any of the first and third special figure 2 reservations correspond to the off-holds for which the pre-judgment result is “off”, the condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, when the current special figure 2 reserved ball count is “4”, and the special figure 2 reserved corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “1” to “3” is out of the reserved state. This condition is satisfied. In the high base state, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is significantly higher than in the low base state, so that the special figure 2 reservation is easily secured. For this reason, it can be said that the condition relating to the special figure 2 reserved ball count (three or more in this example) is relatively easy to be satisfied. In addition, as a case where the condition according to the above (1) is not satisfied, for example, the number of stored special figure 2 is 2 or less (special figure 2 reserved ball number ≦ 2), or the special figure 2 reserved For example, although three or more pieces are stored, a large hit holding which prevents three or more consecutive deviation changes is included therein.

  In the above-described transition conditions, regarding (2) winning in the transition lottery, in the present embodiment, a mode transition determination random number is provided as the effect determination random number, and the random number is acquired in S4501 described above. Then, by determining the acquired random number value based on a lottery table (not shown), the effect mode shift lottery (random number lottery) is performed. The transfer lottery is executed in S4805, and in this embodiment, the transfer lottery is won with a probability of about 50%. It should be noted that these transition conditions are merely examples, and it is of course possible to define conditions other than the above conditions, and the number (type) of conditions is arbitrary.

  In S4805, it is determined whether or not the above two transition conditions are satisfied. If both of the conditions are satisfied (YES in S4805), it is determined that the transition condition to the production mode D is satisfied, and the production mode is set. Processing (S4806 to S4808) for shifting (switching) from “C” to “D” is performed. Specifically, first, in S4806, the value M is set in the second mode counter (S4806). The second mode counter is a setting period of the effect mode E when the mode is changed from the effect mode C (the first effect mode) to the effect mode D (the second effect mode) when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high base state. Is provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). In the present embodiment, the second mode counter is a subtraction type counter capable of counting the number of times the special symbol has changed since the shift to the effect mode D, and until the value of the second mode counter becomes “0”. The effect mode D is set. The subtraction processing of the second mode counter is performed in the same manner as the first mode counter described above.

  Further, the value M set in the second mode counter is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of disconnection suspensions when it is determined that the above-mentioned transition condition (1) is satisfied. For example, if the number of special figure 2 departure suspensions at the time of the determination of the transition condition (1) is “4”, “3” is set to the second mode counter, and the special figure 2 at the time of the determination of the transition condition (1) is set. If the number of missed suspensions is “3”, “2” is set to the second mode counter. The value M only needs to be a value that can reliably execute the transition from the production mode D to the production mode E, which will be described later, before a big hit occurs. At least one deviation change in the production mode D is performed once. The value may be any value as long as the value can be shifted to the effect mode E by the subsequent fluctuation after the operation. In addition, the value M set in the second mode counter is, for example, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of determining the transition condition (1) (that is, the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls). For example, it is also possible to use a value that can be shifted to the effect mode E within the special figure 2 reservation (remaining) stored when the effect mode C is shifted to the effect mode D.

  Next, in S4807, the mode status is set to "4" (S4807). As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode status “4” corresponds to the effect mode D. Therefore, by setting the mode status to “4” in S4807, the effect mode becomes “D” when executing (starting) the present variable effect. When the mode status is set to "4" in this way, an effect mode D designating command for designating the effect mode D is set in the sub output buffer (S4808), and the present process ends.

  The effect mode D designation command set in S4808 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the variable effect start command set in the sub output buffer in S4507. In response to this, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image data for the fluctuation effect and the image data for the effect mode D (background image data in this example) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays the image data on the image display device 7. On the screen 7a, a fluctuating effect and the like are executed based on the read image data, and a background corresponding to the effect mode D is displayed with the execution (start) of the fluctuating effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53B, a background (also referred to as a “blue background”) drawn based on blue is displayed as the background of the display screen 7a corresponding to the effect mode D. The blue background corresponds to the low-probability high base state in principle, and indicates that the current gaming state is the low-probability high base state (hours-saving gaming state) (in this example, the character of “chance time”) ) Is also provided as a background for state notification.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4804 that the high probability flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in S4804), the processing in S4807 and S4808 is performed without performing the processing in S4805 and S4806. In this case, since the gaming state after the big hit game is the low-probability-high base state, the game mode shifts (switches) to the effect mode E corresponding thereto, and thereafter, the remaining 80 times until the low-probability-high base state ends. The setting of the effect mode D is maintained until the special symbol fluctuating display is performed or a big hit occurs during that time. When the low-probability high-base state ends and the low-probability low-base state ends without generating a big hit, the effect mode shifts from “D” to “A” (or “B”) accordingly (switches). ).

  If it is determined in S4805 that the effect mode is not to be shifted from “C” to “D” (no switching) (NO in S4805), that is, if the two shift conditions (1) and (2) described above are satisfied, If at least one of them is not satisfied, processing (S4812, S4813) for shifting (switching) the effect mode from "C" to "E" is performed. Specifically, in S4812, the mode status is set to “5” (S4812). As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. Therefore, by setting the mode status to “5” in S4812, the effect mode becomes “E” when executing (starting) the present variable effect. Since the production mode E corresponds to the high-probability and high-base state, the transition (switching) from the production mode C (first production mode) to the production mode E (third production mode) at this time makes the production mode originally. It is based on the game state. When the mode status is set to "5" in this way, an effect mode E designating command for designating the effect mode E is set in the sub output buffer (S4813), and the present process ends.

  The effect mode E designation command set in S4813 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) together with the variable effect start command set in the sub output buffer in S4507. In response to this, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image data for the fluctuation effect and the image data for the effect mode E (background image data in this example) from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the image data on the image display device 7. On the screen 7a, a fluctuating effect is performed based on the read image data, and a background corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed with the execution (start) of the fluctuating effect. As described above, the background of the display screen 7a corresponding to the effect mode E is the red background corresponding to the high-accuracy high-basis state (see FIG. 53 (c)).

  The above is the case where the effect mode C after the big hit game is ended is switched (switched) to the effect mode D or E based on the elapse of a predetermined period (in this example, the execution of the special symbol change display 20 times). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4802 that the current mode status is not “3” (NO in S4802), that is, if the current production mode is not “C”, Proceed to step S4809.

  In S4809, it is determined whether or not the current mode status is “4”, that is, whether or not the current effect mode is “D” (S4809). As described above, the effect mode is changed to “D” (mode status “4”) in the effect mode C (mode status “3”) after the big hit game, in which 20 special symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. (YES in S4803), the game state is the low-probability base state (NO in S4804 → S4807), or the game state is the high-probability base and the transition condition is satisfied (S4804). And YES → S4805 and YES → S4806 → S4807).

  In S4809, when it is determined that the mode status is not “4” (NO in S4809), this process ends without performing the processes of S4810 and thereafter, and the mode status is “4” (when the effect mode is “D”). If it is determined that there is (YES in S4809), it is determined whether the high probability flag is ON (S4810). In S4810, when it is determined that the high probability flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in S4810), the present effect mode D is caused by the fact that the gaming state after the big hit game is the low-probability high base state. Since the setting has been made through the production mode C, and thereafter, the transition (switching) of the production mode is not performed until the low-accuracy-high base state ends, this processing is performed without performing the processing after S4811. Finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4810 that the high probability flag is ON (YES in S4810), it is determined whether the value of the second mode counter is zero (S4811), and if not, the value is not zero (S4811). NO), this process ends without performing the processes after S4812. In this case, even though the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-basis state, the effect mode is still “D”. On the other hand, when the value of the second mode counter is zero (YES in S4811), that is, the effect mode has shifted from “C” to “D” despite the high accuracy and high base state (switching). After that, in the effect mode D, if the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed corresponding to the value M set in S4807 described above, the subsequent effect modes are changed to the effect mode (the main In the example, the processing of S4812 and S4813 is performed to set the production mode E), and the processing ends. The processing of S4812 and S4813 is as described above, and the display content (background) of the display screen 7a is switched from the blue background to the red background by the transition (switching) of the effect mode from “D” to “E” (FIG. 53 (b), (c)).

[Preliminary notice production]
Next, a description will be given of the hold announcement effect of the present embodiment realized by the above-described hold advance setting process (S4400). First, with respect to the first production reservation 9a (first reservation symbol) corresponding to the first special reservation, the normal (default) first production reservation 9a in which the reservation notice production is not performed is as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In addition, the display color is a "white" circular pattern. The first effect suspension 9a is a first effect suspension display area 9c on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 by increasing the number of special figure 1 suspension balls based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20. Will be added to the display. On the other hand, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the first special figure hold is exhausted), the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c has the oldest first storage order. The first production reservation 9a (in this example, the first production reservation 9a displayed on the left end of the first production reservation display area 9c) corresponding to the special figure reservation is moved and displayed in the fluctuation reservation display area 9e, and accompanying this, The other first effect reservations 9a displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c are moved and displayed one by one (shift display) to the left (see FIG. 50 (a)). The effect suspension displayed in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e corresponds to the special symbol (also referred to as “the fluctuation”) in the fluctuation display for which the new fluctuation display has been started, and the fluctuation display relating to the fluctuation ends. At a predetermined time before the execution, the information is deleted from the display screen 7a (the fluctuation suspension display area 9e). This deletion can be performed, for example, based on the satisfaction of the display suspension display termination condition in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e described above.

  On the other hand, when a hold announcement effect using the first effect hold 9a (Special figure 1 hold advance effect) is performed, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is a normal color (white in this example). The color changes to a different predetermined notice color (notice display mode). Depending on the display color of the first effect hold 9a displayed in the notice display mode, the possibility that the display result of the variable display based on the first special figure hold (notice target hold) corresponding thereto becomes a big hit (specific display result). It is suggestive. In the special figure 1 reservation notice effect of the present embodiment, the display color of the first effect reservation 9a is any one of four colors of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold” from normal “white”. Is displayed. Then, among the four notice colors (notice display mode), “gold” has the highest hit reliability, and the hit reliability decreases in the order of “red”, “green”, and “blue”. Like that. In the present embodiment, the announcement of the jackpot reliability based on the display color change of the effect hold (hold change notice) is executed as the hold advance effect, and this point uses the second effect hold 9b. The reservation notice production (Tokuzu 2 reservation notice production) is also common.

  The “pattern A1 to A4” (special figure 1 reservation notice type A) and the “patterns B1 to B4” (special figure 1 reservation notice type B) of the special figure 1 reservation notice production pattern are all new first start-ups. When the first production suspension 9a corresponding to the entry (preliminary notice suspension) is displayed (additional display) in the first production suspension display area 9c based on the occurrence of a ball entry (preliminary suspension), the display mode is normally (in this example, " White)) and displayed in a manner changed to any one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”, and the display mode is maintained until the suspension of the notice target is exhausted. . In other words, the special figure 1 hold notice types A and B are both "start change entry hold change notice". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, the pattern for displaying the first effect suspension 9a in “blue” is “pattern A1, B1”, and the first effect suspension 9a is “green”. Are displayed as "patterns A2 and B2", the first effect holding 9a is displayed as "red", the pattern displayed as "pattern A3 and B3", and the first effect holding 9a is displayed as "gold". The pattern is “pattern A4, B4”.

  In the special figure 1 hold notice type A (patterns A1 to A4) and the special figure 1 hold notice type B (patterns B1 to B4), the hold notice effect (hold change) based on each hold notice effect pattern constituting each notice type ) Are the same (execution mode, display mode). Specifically, for example, the first starting ball is generated, and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes “1”, and accordingly, the special figure 1 reserved preliminary announcement effect is pattern A1 (special figure 1 reserved preliminary announcement type A). When executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first effect suspension 9a is displayed at the position (here, the left end) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “1” in the first effect suspension display area 9c. Blue ". The display of the effect suspension with the notice color (here, “blue”) accompanying the starting ball entry means the occurrence (start) of the suspension notice effect (the same applies hereinafter). After that, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first production hold 9a (extension of the notice target suspension), the “blue” first production hold 9a is changed from the first production hold display area 9c as it is. The display is moved to the suspension display area 9e and displayed (see the lower column of FIG. 50B). In addition, for example, the first starting ball is generated and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes “3”, and accordingly, the special figure 1 reserved preliminary announcement effect is executed in a pattern B1 (special figure 1 reserved preliminary announcement type B). In this case, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the first effect suspension is displayed at a position (here, the third position from the left end) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserve ball number “3” in the first effect suspension display area 9c. 9a is displayed in "blue". After that, while the two first special figure reservations generated before the "blue" first production reservation 9a are consumed, the display mode of the "blue" first production reservation 9a remains unchanged. Only the position moves (shifts). Then, with the completion of the notice target reservation, the “blue” first effect reservation 9a corresponding to the notice target reservation is moved from the first effect reservation display area 9c to the variable reservation display area 9e and is displayed (FIG. 50 (c), see lower).

  In addition, among the special figure 1 reservation notice effect patterns, “patterns C1 to C7” (special figure 1 reservation notice type C) are related to the notice target reservation newly generated (acquired) based on the first starting ball. In the case of displaying (additionally displaying) the one effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c, the display mode may be a normal "white", or "blue", "green", and "red" of the notice display mode. , And before the notice is suspended, the display mode is changed to a color ("blue", "green", "red ”Or“ gold ”). In other words, the special figure 1 reservation notice type C is “preliminary change notice at the time of starting ball entry and / or digestion”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), the pattern in which the first effect 9a is initially displayed in “white” and then changed to “blue” is referred to as “pattern C1”. A pattern that is initially displayed in “white” and then changes to “green” is referred to as “pattern C2”, and a pattern in which the first effect storage 9a is initially displayed in “white” and then changes to “red” is referred to as “pattern C3”. The pattern in which the first effect 9a is initially displayed in "blue" and then changed to "green" is referred to as "pattern C4". The first effect 9a is initially displayed in "blue" and then changed to "red". The pattern to be changed is referred to as “pattern C5”, and the pattern for changing the display to “red” after initially displaying the first effect holding 9a in “green” is referred to as “pattern C6”. It is set to "pattern C7" a pattern to be changed to "gold" after viewing the in the original "red".

  Specifically, for example, the first starting ball is generated and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes “3”. When executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the first effect suspension 9a is displayed in "blue" at a position corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "3" in the first effect suspension display area 9c. You. Thereafter, the display color of the first production hold 9a changes from "blue" to "red" before the two first special figure reservations generated before the "blue" first production hold 9a are consumed. . That is, the display color of the first effect suspension 9a changes from “blue” to “red” in the first effect suspension display area 9c (see the middle column of FIG. 50D). Then, as the notice target reservation is consumed, the “red” first effect reservation 9a corresponding to the notice target reservation is moved from the first effect reservation display area 9c to the variable reservation display area 9e and displayed (FIG. 50 (d) see lower column). In addition, the change timing (timing) when the display color of the production suspension changes in the production suspension display area is determined in advance in the suspension announcement production pattern, or under the control of the production control microcomputer 91 or the image control microcomputer 101. Can be determined each time (the same applies hereinafter).

  At the time of execution of the special figure 1 suspension notice production effect, based on any of the special figure 1 reservation advance notice tables A to C shown in FIGS. Either one is selected, but in each table, the pattern in which the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “gold” is when the preliminary determination result (hold look-ahead result) related to the notice target hold is a big hit Can be selected. That is, the patterns A4, B4, and C7 in which the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is "gold" are the big hit determination patterns. In addition, in each table, regarding the special figure 1 hold announcement effect pattern other than “gold”, when the preliminary determination result regarding the notice object hold is a big hit, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is “red”. The selectivity (selectivity) of the pattern becomes higher than the other patterns. Hereinafter, the selectivity becomes lower in the order of the “green” pattern and the “blue” pattern. I have.

  On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the notice target is out of order, the selectability (selection rate) of the pattern in which the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is “blue” is higher than that of the other patterns. In the following, the selectability becomes lower in the order of the pattern “green” and the pattern “red”. When the result of the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the notice target is “out of reach”, either the pattern in which the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is “blue” or the pattern in which the display color is “green” is selected. And other patterns are not selected. As a result, of the four notice colors (notice display mode), “gold” has a jackpot reliability of “100%” (fixed jackpot), and “red” has the highest jackpot reliability other than “gold”. The setting is such that the big hit reliability decreases in the order of “green” and “blue”.

  Next, with respect to the second effect hold 9b (second hold symbol) corresponding to the second special hold, a normal (default) second effect hold 9b in which no hold announcement effect is performed is shown in FIG. 51 (a). Thus, the display color is a “white” triangle pattern. In addition, the normal display mode (addition display, moving display, erasing, etc.) of the second effect hold 9b accompanying the increase / decrease of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is the same as that of the first effect hold 9a described above (FIG. 50 (a)). ), And a description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, with respect to the hold announcement effect using the second effect hold 9b (special figure 2 hold advance announcement effect), of the special figure 2 hold advance notice types A to C, among the special figure 2 hold advance announcement types A to C, the hold announcement effect is provided. Pattern type (type and number of notice color), execution form of hold notice effect based on hold notice effect pattern (change mode of display color), and table structure for selecting hold notice effect pattern (each hold notice effect pattern Selectability) is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 reservation notice effect type A to C (see FIGS. 48 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 49 (a) to (c)). The description of the essential parts is omitted.

  On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 2 reservation notice effect, a part different from the special figure 1 reservation notice effect will be described first. It is different from the display mode (display mode of the specific storage display) of the hold advance effect based on the special figure 1 hold advance effect pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 suspension announcement effect of the present embodiment, the display color of the second effect suspension 9b is not only the announcement color based on the suspension announcement effect pattern, but also as shown in FIGS. 51 (b) to (d). , A predetermined image is added to the second effect suspension 9b and displayed. In the present embodiment, the predetermined image is a smoke image S representing a state in which smoke (smoke) is generated from the second effect suspension 9b. This smoke image S is displayed in the same color as the notice color set as the display color of the second effect suspension 9b when executing the special figure 2 suspension preliminary effect (see FIGS. 51B to 51D). reference). For this reason, in the special figure 2 reservation advance production, the production suspension (specific production suspension) with a change in display color is displayed in a more prominent manner than in the special figure 1 suspension preliminary production.

  As described above, the display mode of the special notice 2 reserved advance effect (display mode of the specific storage display) is made more prominent than the display mode of the special figure 1 pending advance effect (display mode of the specific storage display) (highlighted display mode). This is because the game state when the special figure 2 reservation notice effect is executed is the high base state, and in the high base state, the execution frequency of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes higher than that in the low base state, As a result, the digestion speed of the second special figure reservation is faster than the digestion speed of the first special figure reservation in the low base state. In other words, in the special figure 2 suspension announcement effect, the display period of the second effect suspension 9b corresponding to the suspension until the notice target suspension is exhausted is shorter than that in the special figure 1 suspension announcement effect.

  In addition, the special notice 2 reservation notice effect pattern includes reservation notice effect patterns (patterns D1 to D5) of the special notice 2 reservation notice type D which do not exist in the special figure 1 reservation notice effect pattern (FIG. 49 (d)). )). The “patterns D1 to D5” (special figure 2 suspension preliminary notice type D) is a second production suspension display area in which the second production suspension 9b related to the notice target suspension newly generated (acquired) based on the second starting ball is displayed in the second production suspension display area. In the case of displaying (additional display) on 9d, the display mode is changed from a normal triangle to a “star”, and the display mode of “star” is maintained until the notice target hold is exhausted. At the timing when the second effect hold 9b is moved from the second effect hold display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e when the notice object hold is consumed, an effect display in which lightning strikes the star-shaped second effect hold 9b ( (Display of the lightning image G), and accordingly, the display mode of the second effect suspension 9b is left as “star-shaped”, or one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”) (See FIG. 51 (e)). ). In other words, the special notice 2 suspension notice type D is a suspension notice effect produced by a combination of the “suspension change notice at the time of starting ball entry” and the “fluctuation suspension change notice”. In this case, the display of the “star-shaped” effect suspension associated with the starting ball entry means the occurrence (start) of the suspension notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), the pattern for displaying the second effect suspension 9b as a “star” in both the second effect suspension display area 9d and the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is “pattern D1”. The pattern for displaying the second effect hold 9b as “star” in the second effect hold display area 9d and for displaying “blue” in the variable hold display area 9e is referred to as “pattern D2”. The pattern 9b is displayed as “star” in the second effect hold display area 9d and the pattern displayed as “green” in the change hold display area 9e is “pattern D3”, and the second effect hold 9b is displayed in the second effect hold display. The pattern displayed as “star” in the area 9d and displayed as “red” in the fluctuation holding display area 9e is “pattern D4”, and the second effect holding 9b is the second effect. It is set to a pattern to be displayed as a "gold", "pattern D5" in fluctuation hold display region 9e and displays as "star" in distillate display area 9d.

  Specifically, for example, the second starting ball is generated and the number of reserved special figure 2 balls becomes “3”, and accordingly, the special figure 2 reserved preliminary announcement effect is a pattern D4 (special figure 2 reserved preliminary announcement type D). When executed, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the second effect suspension 9b is displayed as a “star” at a position corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension ball number “3” in the second effect suspension display area 9d. Is done. After that, the second effect suspension 9b is maintained in the “star shape” until the two second special figure reservations generated before the second effect suspension 9b of the “star” are consumed. That is, at least in the second effect suspension display area 9d, the display form of the second effect suspension 9a is maintained in a “star shape” (see the second from the top in FIG. 51 (e)). Then, with the completion of the notice target reservation, when the “star-shaped” second effect reservation 9b corresponding to the notice target reservation is moved from the second effect reservation display area 9d to the fluctuation reservation display area 9e as it is, the fluctuation reservation display area The effect display (display of the lightning image G) in which lightning is released is performed on the second effect suspension 9b of the “star” displayed in 9e (see the third from the top in FIG. 51 (e)). The star shape is destroyed by the lightning, and the second effect suspension 9b is displayed in a triangle “red” on the fluctuation suspension display area 9e (see the fourth from the top in FIG. 51 (e)). In the pattern D1, the effect display (display of the lightning image G) in which lightning is released is performed on the "star-shaped" second effect suspension 9b displayed in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e. The star shape is maintained without being destroyed.

  At the time of execution of the special figure 2 suspension notice effect, based on one of the special figure 2 reservation notice tables A to D shown in FIGS. Either one is selected, and among them, in the special figure 2 reservation advance notice table D, the pattern in which the display color of the second effect suspension 9b is finally “gold” is a result of the preliminary judgment related to the notice target suspension. Is a big hit. That is, the pattern D5 in which the display color of the second effect suspension 9b is “gold” is a big hit fixed pattern. In addition, in the special figure 2 reservation advance notice table D, for the patterns D1 to D4 other than “gold”, the display color of the second effect suspension 9b is “red The selectability (selection rate) of the pattern D4 that becomes "" is higher than that of the other patterns. Hereinafter, the pattern D3 that becomes "green" and the pattern D2 that becomes "blue" can be selected in this order. Therefore, the pattern D1 in which the second effect suspension 9b is maintained in a star shape until the end is not selected.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reservation advance notice table D, when the preliminary judgment result concerning the notice target suspension is “with or without reach”, the pattern in which the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is “blue”, respectively. The selectivity (selection rate) of D2 is higher than other patterns, and the selectivity decreases in the order of "green" pattern D3 and "red" pattern D4. ing. If the result of the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the notice target is “out of reach”, the pattern D1 in which the second effect suspension 9b is maintained in a star shape until the end is selected, and other patterns are not selected. It has become something. The pattern D1 is selected only when the result of the preliminary determination relating to the suspension of the notice target is “out of reach”. That is, the pattern D1 is a so-called “gase” reservation notice effect.

  The above is one mode of the pending announcement effect according to the present embodiment, but in the present embodiment, during execution of the pending announcement effect, the special map suspension that is consumed before the announcement target suspension that triggered the execution is a big hit. If a big hit occurs in a state where the production hold is displayed in the notice display mode, the hold announcement production ends with the occurrence of the big hit, and all the production holds are not released during the big hit game. It is configured to be displayed. The effect hold that has been displayed in the notice display mode until the occurrence of the big hit is displayed in the normal display mode after the big hit game ends. Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the occurrence of the big hit, at least all the storage contents (holding prefetch information) of the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 are initialized. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 initializes the effect suspension information storage area in response to the occurrence of the big hit because the pachinko gaming machine 1 prioritizes the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation over the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation. This is because the fairness of the game is ensured because the reservation priority digestion (special figure 2 priority change) is adopted. Note that the initialization of the production suspension information storage area is performed for all of the special figure 1 production suspension information corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 production suspension information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, it is possible to target only the effect suspension information corresponding to the special figure suspension that is not preferentially digested (in this embodiment, the special figure 1 effect suspension information).

  Here, the effect hold (first effect hold 9a, second effect hold 9b) displayed in a normal display mode (circular white and triangular white in this example) is also referred to as “normal storage display”, and a notice display mode. "Specific storage display" refers to the production suspension (first production suspension 9a, second production suspension 9b) displayed in (in this example, four colors of blue, green, red, and gold, star shape, smoke image S, etc.). Also called. In addition, the hold announcement effect in which the effect hold display mode displayed in the effect hold display area (the first effect hold display area 9c, the second effect hold display area 9d) changes to the advance display mode (for example, FIG. 50B) To (d) and FIGS. 51 (b) to (e)) are also referred to as “first notice effects”, and a hold notice effect in which the display mode of the effect change in the variable hold display area 9e is changed (for example, FIG. 51 (e)) is also referred to as “second notice effect”. Further, as a mode related to the second preview effect, the special notice 1 reserved preview type in which the second preview effect is not executed (the mode of the reserved preview effect in the low base state) is also referred to as a “first mode”, and the second preview effect. Of the special notice 2 which can be executed (a form of the reservation notice effect in the high base state) is also referred to as a “second form”. The effect suspension displayed in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is also referred to as “correspondence display”, and the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is also referred to as “correspondence display means”.

[Reach production]
Next, the reach effect of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as a result of analyzing the change start command in S4502, the change pattern designation command included in the change start command specifies a change pattern (see FIG. 9) having a change time of 30000 ms or more. In this case, the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol. In response to this, when a fluctuation start command including information (command) designating a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30000 ms or more is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in S4504 that the effect pattern of the reach fluctuation effect ( A table for determining a reach effect pattern) is set, and in the following S4505, a reach effect pattern is determined with reference to the set table, and set. When the fluctuation effect start command including the reach effect pattern (variation effect pattern) set in this way is transmitted to the image control board 100, the reach fluctuation effect based on the reach effect pattern is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, a reach effect pattern determination table A (hereinafter also referred to as “reach table A”) for the low base state (for the time reduction state) shown in FIG. And a reach effect pattern determination table B (hereinafter also referred to as “reach table B”) for the high base state (for the time reduction state) shown in FIG. 54B. In these tables, when the fluctuation pattern designation command included in the received fluctuation start command is a fluctuation pattern (any of P1 to P6, P8 to P10) with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms or more in the low base state (non-time saving state). In FIG. 54A, the “reach table A” shown in FIG. 54A is set, and when the fluctuation pattern is any of P12 to P17 or P19 to P21 with a fluctuation time of 30000 ms or more in the high base state (time saving state). Is set to the "reach table B" shown in FIG.

  Then, when performing the reach variation effect in the low-probability low-base state, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the reach effect pattern using the reach table A (S4505), and reaches the reach in the low-probability high-base state. In the case where the fluctuation effect is executed and the case where the reach fluctuation effect is executed in the highly accurate and high base state, the reach effect pattern is determined using the reach table B (S4505). In other words, when the reach variation effect is executed when the effect mode at the time when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the change mode is “effect mode A” or “effect mode B”, the reach effect is produced using the reach table A. The pattern is determined (S4505), and when the reach variation effect is executed in the "effect mode C", "effect mode D" or "effect mode E", the reach effect pattern is determined using the reach table B. (S4505).

  In this embodiment, as described above, there are a total of six types of reach effects of three types of normal reach effects (reach A to C) and three types of super reach effect (SP reach A to C). I have. In response to this, the tables shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and (b) show the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the present time specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in S4502, Based on the random number for variable effect determination acquired in S4501, the reach effect pattern is set to “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C”, “SP reach A”, “SP reach B” and “ It has a data structure that can be determined to be any one of “SP reach C”. The random number for change effect determination in this embodiment takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”.

  Specifically, the reach table A for the low base state includes the special symbol variation patterns “P1”, “P2”, “P3”, “P4, P8”, “P5, P9”, and “P6, P10” ( (See FIG. 9), the random number value for fluctuation effect determination (0 to 99) is assigned to any of the six types of reach effects described above. In addition, the reach table B for the high base state includes special pattern fluctuation patterns “P12”, “P13”, “P14”, “P15, P19”, “P16, P20”, and “P17, P21” (see FIG. 9). ) Are assigned random number values (0 to 99) for determining a floating effect to any of the six types of reach effects described above. In the tables shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, "-" indicates that a random value is not assigned, and this portion is not selected (not selected).

  Here, the contents of the six types of reach effects according to the present embodiment will be described. In each of the reach contents (rearrangement mode) of the reach reach of reach A to C and SP reach A to C, the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (that is, a change pattern of the special symbol is a big hit change pattern). Are included, and those corresponding to the case of a deviation (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol is a variation pattern) are included. In addition, the low base state and the high base state such as “reach A” in the low base state and “reach A” in the high base state, and “SP reach C” in the low base state and “SP reach C” in the high base state. Regarding the same type of reach production regardless of the game state, the basic flow (skeleton part) of each production is the same, and the characters appearing in SP reach and the story of the development production are also the same ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect image data used when executing the reach effect is common (similar) in the low base state and the high base state. However, it is also possible to make the details of the part of the background and the part of the character appearing in the reach different depending on the game state, with the same basics of the reach effect. In this case, even for the same type of reach effect, the effect image data used when executing the reach effect can be different depending on the game state.

  Each of reach A to C is a normal reach effect corresponding to a variation pattern of which variation time is 30,000 ms (big hit: “P3” “P14”, departure: “P6” “P10” “P17” “P21”). Specifically, as the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and perform scroll display (vertical scroll), at a predetermined timing, the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R (second symbol). When the stop symbol) stops at the same symbol (temporary stop), the reach is established. Until the reach is established, the same fluctuation mode is achieved in each reach effect of reach A to C. Note that the reach effects of SP reach A to C, which will be described later, also have the same variation mode until reach is established.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the reach A, after the reach is established, the middle effect design 8C (final stop design) continues the vertical scroll until the end of the fluctuation (see a1), and the scroll display is performed. After the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped by the end, the effect symbol 8 is fixedly stopped with a double eye (big hit mode) or a loose eye (missing mode). In the reach B, after the reach is established, the mode of the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is changed from the vertical scroll mode to the vertical rotation mode, and the medium effect symbol 8C is switched to the vertical rotation mode. Do. Then, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped by the end of the switching display of the vertical rotation, the effect symbol 8 is determined and stopped with a double-eye (big hit mode) or a loose eye (missing mode). Further, in the reach C, after the reach is established, the mode of the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is changed from the vertical scroll mode to the horizontal rotation mode, and the medium effect symbol 8C is switched to the horizontal rotation mode. Do. Then, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped by the end of the switching display of the lateral rotation, the effect symbol 8 is determined and stopped with a double eye (big hit mode) or a loose eye (missing mode).

  Next, SP reach A and SP reach B are super reach effects corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 45000 ms or more, and a fluctuation time of 45000 ms (big hit: “P2” “P13”, departure: “P5” “P9” There are those corresponding to “P16” and “P20”) and those corresponding to the fluctuation time of 75000 ms (big hits: “P1” and “P12”, departures: “P4”, “P8”, “P15” and “P19”). SP Reach A corresponds to a fluctuation time of 45000 ms and a fluctuation time of 75000 ms. Characters appearing during the SP reach production and the story (development) of the production are basically the same. . That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), after the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stop at the same symbol (temporary stop) and reach is established. (B1), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are moved to the upper right of the display screen 7a to be reduced and displayed, and the display of the effect video for SP reach A is started on the display screen 7a. (B2). Then, in SP reach A corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped in accordance with the timing when 45000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 becomes the double-eye pattern (big hit mode) or Determining and stopping at a break (disengagement mode). At this time, the effect display by the effect moving image for SP reach A is completed in a mode according to a big hit or a miss.

  On the other hand, in SP reach A corresponding to the fluctuation time of 75000 ms, the medium effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at the symbol constituting the departure mode at the timing when 45000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and then the medium effect The variable display of the symbol 8C is restarted, and the development effect (display of the effect moving image) for SP reach A is further performed. In other words, it pretends to be off and goes on to the development stage. Then, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped at the timing when 75000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 is definitely stopped at the zoro eyes (big hit mode) or the jerky eyes (missing mode). At this time, the effect display by the advanced effect for SP reach A is completed in a mode according to a big hit or a miss. In addition, about the resumption of the variable display after the temporary stop of the middle effect symbol 8C, not only the medium effect symbol 8C but also the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may restart the variable display. That is, the variable display may be restarted for all of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Regarding SP Reach B, the character corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms and the character corresponding to the fluctuation time of 75000 ms are basically the same as the characters appearing during the SP reach production and the story (development) of the production. Has become. That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), after the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stop at the same symbol (temporary stop) and reach is established. (B1), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state move to the upper right of the display screen 7a and are reduced and displayed, and the display of the effect video for SP reach B is started on the display screen 7a. (B3). Then, in SP reach B corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped in accordance with the timing when 45000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 is in a double-eye pattern (big hit mode) or Determining and stopping at a break (disengagement mode) At this time, the effect display by the effect moving image for SP reach B is completed in a mode according to a big hit or a miss.

  On the other hand, in SP reach B corresponding to the fluctuation time of 75000 ms, the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) temporarily stops at the symbol constituting the disengagement mode at the timing when 45000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and then the fluctuation of the medium effect symbol 8C The display is resumed, and the development effect (display of the effect animation) for SP reach B is further performed. In other words, it pretends to be off and goes on to the development stage. Then, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) is stopped at the timing when 75000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 is definitely stopped at the zoro eyes (big hit mode) or the jerky eyes (missing mode). At this time, the effect display by the advanced effect for SP reach B is completed in a mode according to a big hit or a miss. In addition, also about the resumption of the fluctuation display after the temporary stoppage of the middle effect symbol 8C in the SP reach B, the fluctuation display is restarted for all the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as in the case of the SP reach A described above. May be

  Finally, SP reach C is a super reach effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 75000 ms (big hit: “P1”, “P12”, departure: “P4”, “P8”, “P15”, “P19”). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) and the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) stop (temporarily stop) at the same symbol and reach is established. After that (b1), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are moved to the upper right of the display screen 7a and reduced and displayed, and the effect moving image for SP reach C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is started (b4). Then, after the middle effect symbol 8C (final stop symbol) stops at the timing when 75000 ms elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 is definitely stopped at the zoro eyes (big hit mode) or the jerky eyes (missing mode). At this time, the effect display by the effect moving image for SP reach C is completed in a mode according to a big hit or a miss.

  One of the above reach A to C and SP reach A to D is selected using the reach effect pattern determination table (reach table A or B) shown in FIG. 54 (a) or (b). Is possible. In the reach effect pattern determination table, a random number value for change effect determination (0 to 99) is assigned to each reach effect in consideration of the length of the change time of the special symbol and the result of the determination of the success / failure (that is, the change pattern of the special symbol). Thus, the selection rate (appearance rate, execution probability) of the reach effect pattern, the jackpot reliability, and the like are determined.

  Here, the reach table A for the low base state and the reach table B for the high base state can be selected for a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with a variation time of 75000 ms (variation times of 45000 ms and 30000 ms). As for the effect patterns, the distribution of the random numbers for determining the variable effect is the same. That is, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and (b), among the reach table A and the reach table B, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is “P3 (big hit)”, “P6, P10 (out)”, “P14”. (Big hit) ”or“ P17, P21 (out) ”, the selectivity of the reach effect patterns (reach A to C) that can be selected is, in the case of a big hit, reach A“ 25% ”, The reach B is "35%" and the reach C is "40%", and in the case of a miss, the reach A is "40%", the reach B is "35%", and the reach C is "25%". That is, in the case where the gaming state is the low base state (the effect mode A or B) and in the case where the gaming state is the high base state (any of the effect modes C, D, and E), the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 30000 ms. Is performed, the selectivity (appearance rate) of each reach effect pattern of reach A to C is the same, and the relation of the selectivity (appearance rate) is "reach A <reach B" in case of big hit. <Reach C>, and the case of departure is “reach C <reach B <reach A”.

  In addition, it can be selected when the variation pattern of the special symbol is any of “P2 (big hit)”, “P5, P9 (miss)”, “P13 (big hit)”, and “P15, P19 (miss)”. In the case of a big hit, the selectivity of the reach reach pattern (SP reach A, B) is SP reach A “40%” and SP reach B “60%”. ”, SP reach B“ 40% ”. That is, in the case where the gaming state is the low base state (the effect mode A or B) and in the case where the gaming state is the high base state (any of the effect modes C, D, and E), the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 45000 ms. Is performed, the selectivity (appearance rate) of each reach effect pattern of SP reach A and B is the same, and the relation of the selectivity is "SP reach A <SP reach B" in case of big hit. In the case of the deviation, “SP reach B <SP reach A”.

  On the other hand, the reach table A and the reach table B are different in the distribution of the random number for determining the variation effect for the reach effect pattern that can be selected for the variation pattern with the variation time of 75000 ms. That is, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the selection pattern can be selected when the variation pattern of the special symbol is any of “P1 (big hit)” and “P4, P8 (missing)” in the reach table A. In the case of a big hit, the selectivity of the reach reach production patterns (SP reach A to C) is SP reach A “15%”, SP reach B “40%”, and SP reach C “45%”. In this case, the reach A is “50%”, the SP reach B is “35%”, and the SP reach C is “15%”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the reach table B, it can be selected when the variation pattern of the special symbol is any one of “P12 (big hit)” and “P15, P19 (miss)”. The selectivity of the reach production patterns (SP reach A to C) that are considered to be big hits are SP reach A "14%", SP reach B "39%", and SP reach C "47%". In the case of deviation, reach A “53%”, SP reach B “37%”, and SP reach C “10%”.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is the low base state (the effect mode A or B) and in the case where the gaming state is the high base state (any of the effect modes C, D, and E), the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 75000 ms. Is executed, the selectivity (appearance rate) of each reach effect pattern of “SP reach A to C” is slightly different, but the relation of the selectivity is the same in each game state, and the case of big hit is “SP In the case of reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C, the case of out of reach is "SP reach C <SP reach B <SP reach A".

  According to such a reach effect pattern determination table, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, for reach A to C, which is a normal reach effect, reach reach B has a higher jackpot reliability (expected degree) than reach A. Reach C has a higher hitting reliability than Reach B. For SP reach A to C, which is a super reach production, SP reach B has a higher hit reliability than SP reach A, and SP reach C has a higher hit than SP reach B. Reach production with high reliability. The relationship of the jackpot reliability relating to each of the reach effects is the same regardless of the gaming state (effect mode).

  Further, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the selectivity of the outreach variation (P15, P19) in the high base state (production mode C, D, E) for the SP reach C having the highest jackpot reliability among the SP reach types. The (appearance rate) is lower than the selectivity (appearance rate) in the outlier fluctuation (P4, P8) in the low base state (production mode A, B), while the high base state (production mode C, production mode A, B). The selectivity (appearance rate) in the jackpot variation (P12) in D, E) is higher than the selectivity (appearance rate) in the out-of-place variation (P1) in the low base state (production mode A, B). (See FIGS. 54A and 54B). For this reason, the super-reach production related to SP reach C is performed in the high base state (production mode C, D, E) rather than in the low base state (production mode A, B). Has higher jackpot reliability. In other words, the super reach effect relating to SP reach C has the same effect content but different jackpot reliability depending on the game state when the effect is executed. Here, the super reach production related to the SP reach C that can be executed in the low base state (production mode A, B) is also referred to as “first production”, and is switched to the high base state (production mode C, D, E). The super reach production related to SP reach C that can be executed by the execution is also referred to as “second production”.

[Change notice notice]
Next, a notice effect (variable notice effect) that can be executed with the change effect of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, various advancement effects such as a pre-reading advance notice based on the result of the preliminary determination and the advance notice relating to the current special figure variation display (variable effect) are executed as the advance notice effect at the time of variation. It is possible. In the following, among the fluctuating advance notice effects that can be executed in the present embodiment, the “movable auditory notice notice” and the “comment notice notice”, which are the change notice, will be described. The “movable character announcement” and “comment announcement” can be executed in other effect modes (effect modes A, B, D, and E) except for effect mode C.

  In the present embodiment, after the effect symbols 8 (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) start fluctuating display, the fluctuating display speed of all the symbols becomes high and substantially constant, and then the speed is reduced to the first stop symbol (left). The effect symbol (8L) or the second stop symbol (right effect symbol 8R) is stopped (temporarily stopped) until a stop display (temporary stop) (hereinafter, also referred to as a "first period"), and three effects are made after the reach is established and a predetermined reach effect is performed. The period until the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop (temporary stop display) (hereinafter, also referred to as "second period"), and the period from the time when the variable display is resumed after the temporary stop until the final stop (fixed stop display) (Hereinafter, also referred to as “third period”), it is possible to execute a notice effect (the notice of change) related to the change display at each timing. Of the first to third periods, the announcement effect performed in the first period is also referred to as “first period notice” or “advance early notice”, and the announcement effect performed in the second period. A notice effect performed in the third period is also referred to as a “third period notice” or a “floating end notice”.

  The movable accessory notice is for operating the first movable decorative member 13 (first movable accessory) and the second movable decorative member 14 (second movable accessory) (FIGS. 56A and 57). (See (a) and (b)). That is, the movable role announcement is a preview effect configured by the first movable effect and the second movable effect. The movable auditors' notice according to the present embodiment is executed in the above-described first period (first-period notice) or in the above-described second period, depending on the execution mode (movable auditorium notice pattern). (Third period notice), and (third period notice). The player looks at the first movable decorative member 13 (first movable auditory member) and the second movable decorative member 14 (second movable auditory member) that operate according to the movable auditors' notice, It is possible to estimate (estimate) the effect pattern and the like.

  The execution pattern of the movable auditors notice (movable auditory notice pattern) is determined (set) in S4506 (see FIG. 43) described above, including whether or not the notice is executed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the movable character announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 (b) and the movable announcement determination random number which is a kind of the announcement effect determination random number acquired in S4501 described above. Then, the execution pattern of the movable accessory notice is determined (set) including the execution or non-execution thereof (S4506). The random number for determining the advance notice in this embodiment takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”. When the execution pattern of the movable auditory notice is set in S4506, the movable auditory notice based on the execution pattern (announcement effect pattern) is being displayed while the effect symbol 8 for which the movable auditory notice is set is being changed. Is executed. By the execution of the movable accessory notice, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is variably displaying the effect symbol 8, is covered with the first movable decorative member 13 or the second movable decorative member 14 (FIG. 57). (See (a) and (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the movable accessory notice pattern determination table (hereinafter also referred to as “movable accessory notice table”) of the present embodiment is specified by the analysis result of the change start command in S4502 described above. Based on the variation pattern (any one of P1 to P22) related to the variation display of the special symbol and the random number for determining the advance notice determined in S4501, the movable advance notice pattern is displayed as “movable advance notice”. A to C ”or a data structure that can be determined to be“ None ”in which the movable accessory notice is not executed.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols “P1, P12 (big hit)”, “P2, P13 (big hit)”, “P3, P14 (big hit)”, “P4, P8, P15, P19 (miss)”, “ P5, P9, P16, P20 (off), “P6, P10, P17, P21 (off)”, “P7, P18 (off)”, “P11, P22 (off)” (see FIG. 9) , Random number values (0-99) for movable notice determination are assigned to "none" and "movable character notices A to C", respectively, in consideration of the result of the special symbol hit determination (big hit or miss). It has become. Thereby, the selectivity (appearance rate, execution probability) of the movable auditors notice pattern, the jackpot reliability, and the like are determined.

  Here, among the three types of movable auditory notice patterns A to C, the movable auditory notice A is the first movable decorative member 13 (the first movable ornament member 13) in the above-described first period (early stage of change). ), And is executed as a first period notice (early notice of the early stage of the change). In addition, the movable auditors notice B operates the first movable decorative member 13 (first movable auditorium) in the above-described first period (early stage of fluctuation) and performs the operation before reaching reach (based on the elapse of a predetermined time). After completion of the above, the second movable decorative member 14 (second movable auditorium) is operated in the above-described third period (end of change), and the first period notice (change early notice) and the third period notice ( This is due to a combination with the notice of the end of fluctuation. Further, the movable auditory notice C is for operating the second movable decorative member 14 (second movable auditorium) during the above-described second period (middle period), and is executed as the second period notice (middle period advance notice). Is what is done.

  In the movable character announcement table of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is “P11, P22” (out of range), all of the random numbers for movable announcement determination of “0 to 99” are assigned to “none”. As a result, the movable accessory notice is not selected (executed). This is because the departure variation patterns P11 and P22 correspond to the variation time (short variation time) for the shortened variation, and it is difficult to sufficiently secure the execution time of the movable accessory notice. Further, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is a deviation variation pattern other than “P11, P22”, the random numbers for movable announcement determination of “0 to 99” are assigned to “none” and “movable auditorium announcement A”. And is not assigned to “movable auditorium notice B” and “movable auditorium notice C”. For this reason, the “movable auditorium notice B” and the “movable auditorium notice C” are not selected (executed) in the deviation change. Furthermore, for any of the deviation fluctuation patterns other than “P11, P22”, the selection rate of “none” is set to be higher than the selection rate of “movable character notice A”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is “P3, P14” (big hit), the random numbers for the movable announcement determination of “0 to 99” are all patterns (except for the movable movable body announcement B) ( (Including “none”), and the movable accessory notice B is not selected (executed). This is because the change time of the big hit change patterns P3 and P14 is shorter than that of the other big hit change patterns, and the change time (for changing the first movable decoration member 13 and the second movable decoration member 14 during one change) is required. This is because the production time is insufficient. That is, if the “first notice of the first period by the first movable effect” and the “notice of the third period by the second movable effect” are performed during one change in which the change time is not so long, the effect during the change becomes complicated. This is because the effect may not be obtained. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is the big hit fluctuation pattern, the selection rate of “None” is set to be lower than that in the case of the deviating fluctuation pattern. "Movable auditory notice B" and "movable auditory notice C" which are not executed (executable) can be selected, and both are set so that the selection rate is higher than "movable auditory notice A". Movable character announcements are easier to execute.

  According to such a movable auditors notice table, the big hit reliability of the movable auditors notice is higher for “movable auditorium notices B and C” than for “movable auditorium notices A” and “movable auditorium notices”. Since neither of the object notices B and C "is selected in the case of a departure, it is a movable accessory notice indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the second movable decorative member 14 (the second movable accessory) operates as the movable accessory notice during the variable display of the effect symbol 8 to constitute the second movable decorative member 14. The three movable bodies 14a to 14c are united on the near side of the display screen 7a to complete one motif (character in this example) as shown in FIG. It will be recognizable.

  Next, the comment notice is included in the above-described first term notice (variable early notice) that can be executed in the first term. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), shortly after the variable display of the effect design 8 is started on the display screen 7a, a character having a predetermined person as a motif (for example, a person character A, a person character) An image (hereinafter, also referred to as a “comment image KG”) relating to a comment issued by the character B or the like is displayed at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. After the display of the comment image KG, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the comment image KG is deleted from the screen, thereby ending the comment notice. The player looks at the content of the comment indicated by the comment image KG (that is, the content of the comment notice), and can estimate (estimate) the jackpot reliability, the effect pattern, and the like related to the change.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 determines (sets) the comment announcement execution pattern including the presence / absence of the execution by performing the comment announcement setting process (S5000) shown in FIG. 47 in S4506 described above. The comment notice setting process (S5000) is a process executed as one process of the notice effect setting process (S4506). In the effect mode C, as described above, the notice effect setting process (S4506) is not executed, and accordingly, the comment notice setting process (S5000) is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the comment notice setting process (S5000), first, the comment notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 (b1) is set (S5001). This table is a table for determining whether or not to execute the comment notice and the content of the comment notice (comment notice pattern) when the notice notice is executed, and includes a low base state (staging modes A and B) and a high base state ( This is common table data that can be used in any of the effect modes D and E). In addition, the table includes a change pattern of the special symbol specified by the analysis result of the change start command in S4502 described above and a comment preview decision random number which is a kind of a preview effect decision random number acquired in S4501 described above. And a data structure capable of determining the comment notice pattern to be any of "comments A to D" having different contents (types) of the comment or "none" for not executing the comment notice based on the comment notice pattern. Has become. The random number for comment notice determination in this embodiment takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols “P1, P12 (big hit)”, “P2, P13 (big hit)”, “P3, P14 (big hit)”, “P4, P8, P15, P19 (miss)”, “ P5, P9, P16, P20 (off), “P6, P10, P17, P21 (off)”, “P7, P18 (off)”, “P11, P22 (off)” (see FIG. 9) , Random numbers for comment notice determination (0 to 99) are assigned to “none” and “comments A to D” in consideration of the result (big hit or miss) of the special symbol hit determination. I have. Thereby, the selection rate (appearance rate, execution probability) of the comment notice pattern, the jackpot reliability, and the like are determined. Although a specific description of the content of each comment of “Comments A to D” is omitted, the content of the comment can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of characters appearing in the effect, game characteristics, and the like. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), in this embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is “P11, P22” (out of range), all the random numbers for comment notice determination of “0 to 99” are “none”. , And the comment notice is not selected (executed). This is because, similarly to the case of the movable auditory notice described above, the departure variation patterns P11 and P22 correspond to the variation time (short variation time) for shortened variation. Further, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the big hit variation pattern, the selection rate of “None” is set to be lower than that in the case of the loss variation pattern, and the comment notice is easily executed. . Further, when the change pattern of the special symbol is a big hit change pattern, the selection rate of “comment D” is high, and thereafter, the selection rate is low in the order of “comment C”, “comment B”, and “comment A”. It is set to be. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is a deviation variation pattern, the selection rate of “comment A” is high, and thereafter, the selection rate is low in the order of “comment B”, “comment C”, and “comment D”. It is set to be. For this reason, the big hit reliability of the comment notice is highest in “comment D”, and then decreases in the order of “comment C”, “comment B”, and “comment A”.

  When such a comment notice pattern determination table is set (S5001), a comment notice pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the comment notice decision random value with reference to the table (S5002). . As a result, when the comment notice is not executed (NO in S5003), that is, when the selection result in S5002 is “none”, the processing of S5004 to S5006 (the processing related to the setting of the comment notice pattern) is performed. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the comment notice is executed (YES in S5003), that is, when the selection result in S5002 is any of “comments A to D”, the current gaming state (production mode) is changed to the low base state ( In the case of the effect modes A and B), the comment display pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 58 (b2) is set. In the case of the high base state (effect mode D and E), the comment display shown in FIG. The pattern determination table B is set (S5004). The table is referred to in order to determine the display color of the comment included in the comment image KG (see FIG. 58A) displayed when executing the comment notice (hereinafter, also referred to as “display color of the comment image KG”). It is a table. The comment display pattern determination table is based on the change pattern of the special symbol which is a trigger for executing the comment notice and the comment color determination random number which is a kind of the notice effect determination random number acquired in S4501 described above. Has a data structure that allows the display color (comment display pattern) to be determined to be one of “normal color”, “special color 1”, and “special color 2”. The comment color determining random number of this embodiment takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”.

  More specifically, in the comment display pattern determination tables A and B, the comment color determination random number (0 to 99) and the result of the special symbol hit determination (big hit or miss) are considered for each of the jackpot variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern. In addition, it is assigned to each of “normal color”, “special color 1”, and “special color 2”. Thereby, the big hit reliability of the display color of the comment image KG in the comment notice is determined. In this embodiment, the normal color is “white”, the special color 1 is “red”, and the special color 2 is “gold” (the same applies hereinafter). Further, in the present embodiment, in the comment display pattern determination table B, the comment color determination random value is not assigned to “special color 2” corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. In the present embodiment, the comment display pattern is set to the display color of the comment included in the comment image KG. It is also possible to set the display color or the display color of the background part of the comment.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the comment display pattern determination table A, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the big hit variation pattern, the selectivity of “special color 2” is high, and hereinafter “special color 1” , "Normal colors" are set so that the selectivity becomes lower. On the other hand, in the case of the deviation variation pattern, the selection rate of the “normal color” is set to be high, and thereafter, the selection rate is set to be lower in the order of “special color 1” and “special color 2”. For this reason, in the case where the comment notice is executed in the low base state (the effect modes A and B), the jackpot reliability based on the display color of the comment image KG is highest in the “special color 2 (gold)”. Special color 1 (red) ”and“ normal color (white) ”in this order.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), in the comment display pattern determination table B, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the big hit variation pattern, the selectivity of “special color 2” is high, The selection rate is set to decrease in the order of “1” and “normal color”. On the other hand, in the case of the departure variation pattern, the selection rate of “normal color” is set to be higher than the selection rate of “special color 1”, and “selection color 2” is not selected (selection). (Rate 0%). Further, in the comment display pattern determination table B, the selectivity of the “special color 2” is lower in the case of the big hit variation pattern (2% in this example) as compared with the comment display pattern determination table A, , “Special color 1” and “normal color” have higher selectivity.

  Therefore, when the comment notice is executed in the high base state, the big hit reliability based on the display color of the comment image KG is “special color 2 (gold)” is 100% (big hit fixed). , “Special color 1 (red)” is higher than “normal color (white)”. The “special color 1 (red)” and “normal color (white)” in the high base state are both smaller than the “special color 1 (red)” and “normal color (white)” in the low base state. The jackpot reliability increases.

  When such a comment display pattern determination table is set (S5004), the comment display pattern is determined based on the special pattern variation pattern (big hit or miss) and the comment color determination random value with reference to the table. Select (S5005). Next, in S5006, the mode (comment type and color) of the comment notice to be executed this time is set based on the comment notice pattern selected in S5002 and the comment display pattern selected in S5005 (S5006). When the variable effect start command including the effect pattern of the comment notice set in this way is transmitted to the image control board 100, a comment notice based on the notice effect pattern is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Among the comment notices of the present embodiment executed in this manner, the comment notice with the display color of the comment image KG being golden (special color 2) is a game state at the time of execution of a low base state (effect modes A and B). ), There is a possibility of departure, but the jackpot reliability is the highest. On the other hand, in a high base state (production mode D, E), the possibility of departure is high. There is no jackpot confirmation. As described above, the “golden comment notice” of the present embodiment has the same display mode (production content) regardless of the game state (the same golden color in this example), but the content suggested by the game state (high reliability). Whether it is a big hit or a big hit). Here, the “gold comment notice” that can be executed in the low base state (the production mode A or B in this example) is also referred to as “first production”, and the high base state (the production mode D or E in this example). The "golden comment notice" that can be executed in ()) is also referred to as "second effect".

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the jackpot game ends for jackpots other than the 16R first jackpot (6R second jackpot, 6R third jackpot, 16R fourth jackpot, and 16R fifth jackpot). The effect mode can be set to “C” (first effect mode) during a predetermined period (in this example, during the time when the variable display is performed 20 times), and the effect mode is changed to “C” after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to switch (transfer) from (first effect mode) to “D” (second effect mode) or “E” (third effect mode). For this reason, after the big hit game, the effect mode changes before and after the predetermined period elapses, and the effect content changes accordingly. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switch of the effect mode) after the big hit game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to the low-precision high base state (first game state) or the high-precision high base state (second game state), but the effect mode C (first effect) Mode) is a state non-notification mode corresponding to any game state. On the other hand, the effect mode D (second effect mode) corresponds to the low-probability and high-base state, and the effect mode E (third effect mode) corresponds to the high-accuracy and high-base state. In the effect mode C, the background of the display screen 7a is “green background”, in the effect mode D, the background of the display screen 7a is “blue background”, and in the effect mode E, the background of the display screen 7a is “red background”. (See FIGS. 53 (a)-(c)). For this reason, for a predetermined period (during the set period of the effect mode C) after the big hit game is finished, the player proceeds with the game in a situation where it is difficult (impossible) to grasp the actual game state. That is, the effect mode shifts from "C" to "D" or "E" (switches) after the elapse of the predetermined period, thereby making it possible to easily grasp the gaming state through the background.

  Then, when the gaming state after the big hit game is the high-probability base state, by shifting to the effect mode E, the player is notified that the gaming state is the high-probability base state. In the present embodiment, before shifting to the effect mode E, there is a case in which the effect mode is temporarily shifted to the effect mode D corresponding to the low-probability-high base state different from the actual gaming state. That is, there is a case where a false state notification is performed and then a correct state notification is performed. For this reason, even if the player shifts to the effect mode D after a predetermined period of time after the big hit game, there is a possibility that the player will shift to the effect mode E from there. It is possible to keep holding. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the transition (switching) of the effect mode after the big hit game, and to enhance the interest after the big hit game. Further, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is the high-probability high base state, by shifting from the production mode C to the production mode E via the production mode D, it is expected that the game state is the high-probability high base state. After discouraging the player's feelings, the effect of raising the feelings can be obtained. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest after the big hit game.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit game is the high-precision high base state, a predetermined period (the setting period of the effect mode C) after the big hit game ends. In the case where the storage state of the special figure hold (the special figure 2 hold in this example) stored at this time is a predetermined storage state (predetermined storage mode), the effect mode is temporarily changed from the actual game state to the effect mode. After shifting to the mode (effect mode D in this example), it is possible to shift to an effect mode (effect mode E in this example) that matches the actual playing state. Specifically, when a predetermined period elapses, at least a predetermined number (three in this example) of off-holds counted from the earliest stored hold are stored as the special figure 2 hold, When all of the first to third of the stored special figure 2 reservations are off-hold, it is possible to shift from the production mode C to the production mode D. Then, it is possible to shift from the effect mode D to the effect mode E by the end of the deviation change based on the predetermined number of the suspensions (in this example, three suspensions). For this reason, when the gaming state after the big hit game is the high-accuracy high base state and the effect mode is shifted from “C” to “D” after a predetermined period after the big hit game, the effect mode is thereafter changed to “D”. Since no big hit occurs before the transition from “D” to “E”, the transition to the effect mode E can be executed without fail. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability high base state, and that the effect is achieved by indicating later that the game state is actually the high-probability high base state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect mode shifts from “C” to “D” in the high-accuracy high-base state, when the shift timing is reached (when a predetermined period in the effect mode C elapses). )), The number of times the special symbol is changed corresponding to the number obtained by subtracting “1” from the number of holdings stored in the memory is displayed. The transition to "E" is made. For this reason, from the viewpoint of the player, after the effect mode is shifted from “C” to “D”, all of the special map reservations (missing reservations) stored at the time of the transition are consumed. If the effect mode shifts from “D” to “E”, the actual gaming state after the jackpot game is a high-accuracy high base state, and if the effect mode does not shift from “D” to “E”, the jackpot game It is possible to know that the later actual gaming state is the low-probability and high-base state, respectively. In other words, the actual game state is always clarified by performing the fluctuation display of the special figure reservation (remaining reservation) stored when the effect mode shifts from “C” to “D”. Thus, when the effect mode is shifted from "C" to "D", it is possible to make the time easy to understand for the player without delaying the time when the actual game state becomes apparent. Become.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect mode C after the jackpot game, no notice effect such as a hold notice effect is executed, and in the effect mode D or the effect mode E thereafter, the hold effect is not held. A notice effect such as a notice effect can be executed. For this reason, for example, the production mode C after the big hit game is ended is a production mode in which the player concentrates on a game in which the game state is unknown and the player is nervous, and the production mode D after the production mode C and In the effect mode E, the effect mode C and the effect modes D and E are different from the effect modes having different personalities, such as an effect mode in which the player is expected to generate a big hit under a situation in which the playing state is clear. It is possible to do. As a result, it is possible to enhance the entertainment after the big hit game by making the effects after the big hit game rich.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot game relating to the 16R first big hit (probably variable hit) is completed and the gaming state is in the high-precision high base state, an effect corresponding to the high-precision high base state from the beginning. Mode E (red background) is set. For this reason, when the 16R first big hit occurs as a so-called “initial hit” in the low-probability low-base state, the player recognizes that the gaming state after the big-hit game is the high-precision high-base state and plays the game. It is possible to proceed. On the other hand, when a big hit other than the 16R first big hit occurs, the player proceeds with the game in an unknown state until at least the set period of the initial effect mode C after the big hit game has elapsed. In this way, by causing a difference in the progress of the game after the jackpot game depending on the type of the jackpot that has occurred, it is possible to give the game a sharpness, and it is possible to obtain a gaming property that makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It becomes.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state (low-precision low-base state or high-precision low-base state), the gaming state is set to the high-base state (low-precision high-base state). State or the high-precision high-base state), the form of the hold announcement effect that can be executed is different. That is, in the special figure 1 hold announcement effect that can be executed in the low base state, the first effect hold 9a is displayed in a mode in which the display color is different from the normal display mode (see FIG. 50). . On the other hand, in the special figure 2 preliminary announcement effect that can be executed in the high base state, the second effect suspension 9b displayed in the effect suspension display area is displayed in a different display color from the normal display mode and with a predetermined image (in this example, The display includes a smoke image S) (see FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (d)), and a variable suspension display which does not exist in the special figure 1 suspension announcement effect in the low base state. The display mode change of the effect suspension in the area 9e (second notice effect) is included (see FIG. 51 (e)). This makes it possible to differentiate the hold announcement effect between the low base state and the high base state, and to attract the player's interest in the hold announcement effect in each game state.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 hold announcement effect in the low base state mainly performs a change in the display mode (color change) of the first effect hold 9a, and the change effect display from the first effect display area 9c. While the display mode change (second notice effect) of the first effect hold 9a moved to the area 9e is not executed (first mode), the special figure 2 hold advance effect in the high base state is as follows. The display mode change (color change in this example) of the second effect hold 9b including the predetermined image (the smoke image S in this example) is mainly performed, and in addition to this, the second effect display area 9d is changed to the variable hold display area 9e. (Second notice effect) may be executed (second notice effect). For this reason, in the hold announcement effect in the low base state (special figure 1 hold announcement effect) and in the high base state, the hold announcement effect (special figure 2 hold advance effect), the latter has a greater impact on the player than the former. This makes it easier to give, and makes it possible to firmly differentiate the reservation announcement effect between the low base state and the high base state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the reservation notice effect in each game state, and it is possible to further improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display of the effect hold (second effect hold 9b) in the case of performing the hold notice effect in the high base state in which the digestion pace of the special figure hold is faster than in the low base state. The mode is a more prominent mode (highlighting mode) than the display mode of the production suspension (first production suspension 9a) in the suspension notice production in the low base state, and the suspension notice in the low base state. In the effect, the display mode change of the effect suspension (second notice effect) in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e, which is not executed, can be executed. For this reason, in the high base state, it becomes easier to attract the player's interest to the hold announcement effect, and it is possible to realize a game in which the player is less likely to get bored. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the high base state in which the game is likely to be monotonous by repeatedly displaying the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) with the shortened variation.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the suspension of the notification target is deviated and corresponds to the super-reach fluctuation, a predetermined period after the departure super-reach fluctuation is completed is defined as a suspension notice prohibition period, and during that period, the suspension notice is prohibited. The effect is not executed (started). For this reason, for example, even if a high reliability super-reach effect performed with a hold announcement effect causes a disconnection, and the detachment causes a great disappointment to the player, the hold announcement effect is not executed for a while thereafter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of trust and expectation of the hold notice effect from being significantly impaired. Thus, it is possible to suppress the effect of the hold announcement effect from being reduced and to maintain the interest in the hold announcement effect.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state and when the gaming state is controlled to the high base state, the “super reach of SP reach C” including the same effect contents is provided. The effect and the “gold comment notice” can be executed during the change display of the special symbol (during the change display of the effect symbol 8). Of these, “SP reach C super reach effect” (first effect) in the low base state and “SP reach C super reach effect” (second effect) in the high base state have the same effect contents. Despite this, the latter has a higher hit reach reliability than the former. In addition, although the “golden comment notice” (first production) in the low base state and the “golden comment notice” (second production) in the high base state have the same display mode (production contents), The former suggests that the reliability is relatively high instead of the jackpot determination, and the latter suggests the jackpot determination.

  As described above, while the SP reach production and the announcement production including the same production contents can be executed in the low base state and the high base state, the contents suggested by the productions are changed according to the game state when the production is executed. By making them different, it is possible to make the function (role) of the effect different depending on the game state and the effect mode. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effects performed in each game state or each effect mode, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect (SP reach C, golden comment notice) with a high degree of reliability (expected degree) that can be similarly executed in the low base state and the high base state under a condition more advantageous to the player. When the game is executed in the high base state (low-probability high-base state, high-precision high-base state) in which the game can be advanced, the degree of expectation for the big hit increases. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in an effect with a high degree of reliability (expectation).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first movable decorative member 13 (first movable effect member) and the second movable decorative member are provided around the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 surrounded by the center decorative body 10. 14 (second movable effect means) is provided (see FIG. 56 (a)), and a movable accessory notice for operating these movable decorative members (movable accessory) is displayed while the special symbol is being changed (effect symbol 8). During the variable display). When the first movable decorative member 13 operates according to the notice of the movable character, the first movable decorative member 13 moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a and a part of the screen (in this example, the medium effect design 8C). (A part of the region where is displayed) (see FIG. 57A). Further, when the second movable decorative member 14 operates according to the notice of the movable character, the three movable members 14a to 14c constituting the second movable decorative member 14 move to the near side of the display screen 7a and It is in a state of being close to (coalescing), and covers almost the entire display screen 7a (see FIG. 57 (b)).

  Then, when the first movable decorative member 13 operates and appears on the near side of the screen, it may be either a big hit or a miss, but the big hit reliability is relatively low. On the other hand, when the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable bodies 14a to 14c) operates and appears on the near side of the screen, the big hit is determined. In other words, it is possible to indicate the jackpot reliability by the size of the range of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member when the movable auditory notice (movable effect) is executed. As a result, the effect of the movable role announcement (movable effect) can be enhanced, and it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the type of movable decorative member that operates.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second movable decoration composed of three movable bodies is smaller than the movable movable object notice in which the first movable decoration member 13 composed of one movable body operates to cover a part of the display screen 7a. The movable object notice in which the members 14 are operated and they are united to cover substantially the entire display screen 7a has higher jackpot reliability (100% in this example). The relationship between the jackpot reliability when the first movable decorative member 13 operates and the jackpot reliability when the second movable decorative member 14 operates is such that the movable decorative member appears on the near side of the display screen 7a. It can be said that this is proportional to the magnitude of the impact given to the player. Thereby, the suggestion of the jackpot reliability based on the movable role announcement (movable effect) becomes easy for the player to understand.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the execution mode of the movable character notice that can be executed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (during the fluctuation period), (1) the first stage in the early stage of the fluctuation (the first period) A mode in which the movable decorative member 13 operates (movable accessory notice A by the first movable effect), and (2) the first movable decorative member 13 operates in the early stage of the change, and the end of the change after the operation ends (the A mode in which the second movable decorative member 14 operates in the third movable period (movable accessory notice B by the first movable effect and the second movable effect), and (3) a second movable decorative member 14 in the middle stage of the fluctuation (second period). (Movable auditory notice C by the second movable effect) (see FIG. 56 (b)), and the movable auditory notice is executed in any one of them. It has become possible. For this reason, when performing the movable auditors notice (movable production), it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the at least three aspects is executed. In the present embodiment, the big hit is determined by the operation of the second movable decorative member 14 at the notice of the movable character, and even if the first movable decorative member 13 is operated, the second movable decorative member 14 is thereafter operated. Since there is a possibility that the player can operate (movable auditory notice B), it is possible to increase the sustainability of the player's interest in the movable auditory notice, and the effect of the movable auditory notice can be sufficiently obtained. Becomes

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation pattern (first operation pattern) of the first movable decorative member 13 includes movement (sliding movement) between the standby position and the operation position, rotation at the operation position, and rotation. The pattern is such that a plurality of LEDs (lights) emit light, and the operation pattern (second operation pattern) of the second movable decorative member 14 includes three movable bodies 14a to 14c between the standby position and the operation position. Are performed simultaneously (slide movement), which are completely different patterns. For this reason, the movable role announcement (first movable production) for operating the first movable decorative member 13 and the movable role announcement (second movable production) for operating the second movable decorative member 14 are both movable roles. Even if it is a movable role announcement (movable production) in which an object moves, it is possible to give a completely different impression to the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface of the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable bodies 14a to 14c) is subjected to a shaping process representing one motif (in this example, a character), and the movable bodies 14a to 14c are simultaneously moved to the operating position. The motif is assumed to be completed by moving to each other and being in a state of being united (close to each other) (see FIG. 57 (b)). Compared with the movable effect by the one movable decorative member 13, a greater impact is given to the player. As described above, the operation of the first movable decorative member 13 and the operation of the second movable decorative member 14 are configured to be separately controlled (managed) according to the respective operation patterns. This increases the degree of freedom in the design of the effect, and makes it easier to diversify the operation pattern of the movable decorative member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the effect of the movable role announcement (movable effect).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a right-handed game state (predetermined game state) in which a game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right game area 3B (predetermined area) of the game area 3 to perform a game. At least a special game state (first predetermined game state) and a high base state (second predetermined game state). In addition, a right strike instruction notification (predetermined instruction notification) for instructing to launch a game ball toward the right game area 3B includes a special game state (big hit game) and a high base state (probable change game state, time-short game state). Thus, it is possible to execute in a similar manner. With this, for the player, although the game state is different between the special game state and the high base state, the right-handed instruction notification is executed in a similar manner, so that the game state is either the special game state or the high base state. Even if there is, it becomes easy to recognize the right-handed instruction notification.

  In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) with the start of the first round of the big hit game, Instruction notification is started (executed). Then, the right-handed instruction notification (display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) is continuously executed until the big hit game ends (until the ending effect ends in this example), and Even after the game state has shifted to the high base state (high-precision high base state or low-precision high base state) after the game, the game is executed continuously. That is, the notification of the right-handing instruction in a mode (predetermined mode) of displaying the right-handing instruction image 71 in the right-handing display area 71c is continuously executed from the start of the big hit game (the first round) to the high base state. It has become. Accordingly, for the player, even if the gaming state has shifted from the special gaming state to the high base state, right-handed instruction notification is executed in a similar manner before and after the shift, so that right-handed instruction notification is performed. It will be easy to recognize. In particular, since the same right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position (right-handed display area 71c) in the special game state and the high base state, the ease of recognizing the right-handed instruction notification is more remarkable. It will be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot (ren-chan) in the high-base state becomes a big hit, and the right-hitting instruction notification performed during the high-base state when executing the jackpot game related to the big hit (ren-chan) (Display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) is continuously executed also in the big hit game related to the consecutive chan. That is, the notification of the right-handing instruction in a mode (predetermined mode) of displaying the right-handing instruction image 71 in the right-handing display area 71c is continuously executed from the high base state to the big hit game. With this, for the player, even if the gaming state has shifted from the high base state to the special gaming state, right-handed instruction notification is executed in a similar manner before and after the shift, so that right-handed instruction notification is performed. It will be easy to recognize. In particular, since the same right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position (right-handed display area 71c) in the high base state and the special game state, the ease of recognition of the right-handed instruction is more remarkable. It will be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an opening effect when a big hit (initial hit) occurs in a low-probability low base state, a first hit opening effect including a right hit instruction notification for a first hit is performed. Has become. The right hit instruction notification for the first hit is to display a moving image depicting a state in which a game ball enters the large winning opening 30 located at the lower part of the right game area 3B at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. This is a mode that is more conspicuous than the right-handed instruction notification in which the right-handed instruction image 71 is displayed in the right-handed display area 71c. For this reason, it is possible to positively encourage the player who has proceeded the game by performing a left strike in the low base state to perform a right strike at the start of the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the opening effect (ren-chan opening effect) in the case of a large hit (serial chan) in the high base state, the right-hand instruction for the first hit such as the first hit opening effect (right-hand in the approximate center of the screen) The right-handed instruction notification (display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c) performed during the high base state is not performed without performing the prompting moving image display. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the exaggerated right-handing instruction notification from being repeated many times by repeating the consecutive chan, so that the player does not feel troublesome. In particular, the right strike instruction notification during the high base state is continuously executed in the same mode (same image, same display position) from the special game state (at the time of the big hit game) before shifting to the high base state. Therefore, from the point of view of the player, it can be said that when the consecutive chan is generated, the player is fully aware of performing a right-hand. From this fact, it is effective to take into account the player's psychology in the consecutive-chair opening production, without performing the right-hand instruction notification in the high base state without performing the same right-hand instruction notification as in the first hit opening production. It can be said that this is an instructive notification.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the start of the first round and the subsequent high base state are based on the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol change displays, starting from the start of the first round of the big hit game. Until the processing is completed, the right-handed instruction image 71 is continuously displayed in the right-handed display area 71c. In other words, from the start of the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit to the end of the consecutive chan period, the right-handed instruction image is displayed in the corner (in this example, upper right of the screen) of the display screen 7a in comparison with the screen size. The display is made small, and the right-handed instruction notification is performed in a mode that is not too conspicuous. This is a game state in which the player makes a right-hand shot while avoiding obstruction of the jackpot game effect or the effect symbol game effect in the high base state performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make the person fully recognize (impress).

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the set period of the effect mode C (mode status “3”) after the big hit game is set to one predetermined period (fixed period). In the present embodiment (second embodiment), The setting period of the effect mode C is configured to be any one of a plurality of predetermined periods. Hereinafter, points different from the first embodiment (configuration, operational effects, and the like) will be mainly described, and description of points common to the first embodiment (configuration, operational effects, and the like) will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit end effect mode setting process (S4700) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control unit) at the end of the big hit game is based on the flowchart shown in FIG. In FIG. 59, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and the processes different from those in the first embodiment are denoted by different numbers of steps. Therefore, a description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In the effect mode setting process at the end of the big hit (S4700) of the present embodiment, the process related to the setting of the first mode counter for determining the setting period of the effect mode C (mode status “3”) is different from that of the first embodiment. It has become. Specifically, when the mode status is set to “3” in S4707, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the value N to the first mode counter (S4708a). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects one value from a plurality of predetermined values and sets it as a value N each time the process of S4708a is executed. In the present embodiment, five values “5”, “10”, “15”, “20” and “25” are provided as a plurality of values that can be set as the value N. One of the types is set as the value N. In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 90 is provided with a random number counter for determining the value N. For example, when the big hit game related to the big hit other than the 16R first big hit ends (receiving the ending command), The count value is obtained, and the value N to be set in S4708a is determined based on the obtained count value (value N determined random number value) and a value N determination table (not shown).

  After setting the value N in the first mode counter in this way, the operation is the same as in the first embodiment. That is, the effect mode after the big hit game ends is “C” until the value set in the first mode counter becomes zero. Then, when the first mode counter becomes zero (YES in S4803) by the effect mode shift processing (S4800) shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode shifts from “C” to “D” or “E” (S4807, See S4812 etc.).

  Note that, regarding the selectivity of five types of values to be selected for the value N, it is possible to make the selectivity of each value equal or to make the selectivity different depending on the value. When the selection rate is made different, for example, if the finished big hit game is a probable big hit, the value N is selected from among “5”, “10”, “15”, “20” and “25”. It is possible to increase the selectivity as the value increases, or conversely, to decrease the selectivity as the value increases. In this way, it is possible to suggest (possibly make the player guess) the possibility of the high probability state by the length of the set period in the effect mode C.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the jackpot game ends for jackpots other than the 16R first jackpot (6R second jackpot, 6R third jackpot, 16R fourth jackpot, and 16R fifth jackpot). The setting period of the effect mode C (first effect mode) can be changed each time a big hit occurs. Specifically, when the first mode counter is set to "5" in S4708a, the effect mode C is set until the special symbol is changed five times after the big hit game is completed, and the first mode counter is set. Is set to “10”, the effect mode C is set until the special symbol change display is performed ten times after the big hit game ends, and if the first mode counter is set to “15”, the big hit game ends. After that, it becomes the effect mode C until the special symbol change display is performed 15 times, and when the first mode counter is set to “20”, the effect is produced until the special symbol change display is performed 20 times after the big hit game ends. When the mode is set to C and the first mode counter is set to “25”, the effect mode C is set until the special symbol change display is performed 25 times after the big hit game ends.

  For this reason, after the jackpot game, the period in which the game is advanced while the game state is unknown (the setting period of the effect mode C) can be changed every time a big hit occurs, and accordingly, the effect mode C is switched to the effect mode D or the effect mode. The timing of switching (switching) to the mode E can also be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide variation in the transition (switching) of the effect mode after the big hit game, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game after the big hit game.

  In addition, as the set period of the effect mode C can change, the period during which a notice effect such as a suspended notice effect is not executed can also change. For this reason, it is possible to bring about a change even when the execution of various announcement effects after the big hit game is lifted. As a result, it is possible to enhance the entertainment after the big hit game by making the effects after the big hit game rich.

  As described above, Embodiments 1 and 2 have been described as embodiments of the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and is limited to the description of each claim unless departing from the scope described in each claim. However, it is possible for those skilled in the art to easily replace them, and to appropriately add improvements based on the knowledge usually possessed by those skilled in the art.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode C after the big hit game, when the change display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times ends, and when the next change display (the change effect) is the change, the change of the special symbol is started. Accordingly, the effect mode is shifted from “C” to “D” or “E” (see FIG. 46). It is also possible to shift the effect mode from "C" to "D" or "E" with the start of the big hit change (big hit change effect).

  Specifically, the processing after S4802 in the effect mode transition processing (S4800) can be executed even when the big hit change starts. If it is determined in S4804 that the high-probability flag is ON (YES in S4804), the process of S4812 and S4813 are subsequently performed, and in S4804, it is determined that the high-probability flag is not ON (OFF). In this case (NO in S4804), the processing in S4807 and the processing in S4808 may be performed subsequently. In this way, after the set period of the effect mode C is completed, the mode shifts to the effect mode D or the effect mode E with the start of the next big hit change, so that for the player, the actual start at the change start stage It is possible to obtain a big hit after grasping the game state of the game. Also, when the mode is changed to the production mode E after the production mode D has been entered despite the high accuracy and high base state (S4809 to S4813), the production is also performed in accordance with the start of the big hit variation (big hit variation production). The mode can be shifted from “D” to “E”. In this case as well, after the period of setting the effect mode D in the high-accuracy and high-base state ends, the process proceeds to the effect mode E with the start of the next big hit change, so that the player starts changing. It is possible to obtain a big hit after grasping the actual game state at the stage.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode C in which the gaming state after the big hit game is the high-accuracy high-basis state, the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times and the first mode counter becomes zero. At least, "at least three consecutive fluctuations are ensured", that is, three figures counted from the earliest stored (oldest) special figure hold (special figure 2 hold in this example) Under the condition that the above-mentioned departure suspension is stored (see the above-mentioned transition condition (1)), the effect mode can be shifted from “C” to “D”, and the condition is satisfied. When there is no effect mode, the effect mode can be shifted from "C" to "E" (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, when the jackpot hold is stored as a special figure hold (in this example, special figure 2 hold) when the first mode counter becomes zero, counting from the first special figure hold is performed. Regardless of whether or not three or more off-holds are stored, the effect mode may be shiftable from “C” to “E”. In this case, due to the transition (switching) from the effect mode C (first effect mode) to the effect mode E (third effect mode), the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (second gaming state). After allowing the player to recognize that, a special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on the jackpot hold (specific acquisition information), which can lead to the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect of the effect by shifting to the effect mode after the big hit game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times in the rendering mode C after the big hit game is finished, and the rendering mode is changed from “C” to “C” with the start of the next variation display (variable rendering). Although the transition was to "D" or "E" (the background changes), in the fluctuating production accompanied by the transition of the production mode, which one of the production mode is "D" or "E"? May be performed (mode branching effect). In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol related to the next fluctuation display after the first mode counter becomes zero (for example, in the first embodiment, the 21st fluctuation display after the big hit game), a fluctuation time of 30000 ms (30 seconds) By configuring the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol by the main control unit 80 (the game control microcomputer 81) so that the variation pattern of ()) is always set (selected), the effect time of the transition effect can be secured. It becomes possible. In this way, after the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (20 times in this example) in the rendering mode C is completed, the background is switched with the start of the next variation display (variable rendering), so that the rendering mode is immediately performed. It is easier to attract the player's interest than when the transfer destination is determined, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of shifting to the effect mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode C after the big hit game, no notice effect such as the hold notice effect is executed at all (no possibility of execution), and in the subsequent effect mode D or effect mode E, In this case, a notice effect such as a hold notice effect was executable. On the other hand, even in the production mode C, it is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect such as a reservation announcement effect, and the possibility of executing the preliminary announcement effect such as the reservation announcement effect in the production mode C is due to the reservation announcement effect in the production mode D and the production mode E. Etc. may be lower than the feasibility of the notice effect. Alternatively, the number of types of notice effects, such as a hold notice effect, which can be executed in the effect mode C (the number of notice types corresponding to the effect mode C) is a notice effect such as a hold notice effect, which can be executed in the effect mode D or the effect mode E. (The number of announcement modes corresponding to the effect mode D and the number of announcement types corresponding to the effect mode E). Furthermore, between the effect mode D and the effect mode E, the feasibility of a notice effect such as a hold notice effect is made different, or the number of types of notice effects such as a hold notice effect that can be executed is made different. Is also good. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment after the big hit game by making the effects after the big hit game rich.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect (SP reach C, notice of a golden comment in the first embodiment) that can be executed with the same contents (aspect) in the low base state and the high base state is executed in the low base state. Expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit was higher in the case of execution in the high base state than in the case. On the contrary, in the case of execution in the low base state, However, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is increased. In general, a game played by a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state before reaching such an advantageous gaming state rather than a gaming period in an advantageous gaming state for a player such as a jackpot game or a high base state ( For example, the game period in the low-probability low-base state is longer. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the second movable decorative member 14 is configured by the three movable bodies 14a to 14c and the movable accessory notice (second movable effect) is performed by the operation of the second movable decorative member 14, The three movable bodies 14a to 14c are moved at the same time. On the other hand, instead of moving the three movable bodies 14a to 14c all at once, moving the individual movable bodies in a predetermined order, or moving two of the three simultaneously and moving the remaining one separately. It may be configured to have an operation pattern different from that of the above-described first embodiment, for example, such that the operation pattern is moved all at once when moving (returning) from the operation position to the standby position. Further, the number of movable bodies (movable members) constituting the second movable decorative member 14 does not need to be three, and may be two or four or more, or may be configured by one movable body. It is also possible. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the first movable decorative member 13 is configured by one movable body, but may be configured by a plurality of movable bodies.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the three movable bodies 14a to 14c constituting the second movable decorative member 14 appear in front of the display screen 7a and become close to each other at the operating position (combine), One motif (shape, pattern, etc.) drawn on the surface of the second movable decorative member 14 (the movable bodies 14a to 14c) has been completed. In other words, each of the movable bodies constituting the second movable decorative member 14 is only a part of the motif, and one movable body does not represent anything alone (meaningful one). On the other hand, as for a plurality of movable bodies constituting the movable decorative member, each movable body may independently represent a specific shape, pattern, figure, character, or the like. In this case, not only the mode of moving (moving) all the plurality of movable bodies, but also the mode of moving (moving) some of all the movable bodies such as one movable body and two movable bodies. The effect can be established. Accordingly, it is possible to further diversify the operation pattern (movable effect presentation pattern) of the movable decorative member, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Further, when the movable decorative member is constituted by a plurality of movable bodies, it is possible to make the size of each movable body (the width of a range capable of covering the display screen) different. In this case, the size (large or small) of the range that covers the display screen can be made different depending on the number of the movable bodies moved toward the front side of the display screen or the size (size) thereof. Specifically, for example, the movable decorative member is constituted by three movable bodies A, B, and C, and the size relationship of each movable body is “movable body A <movable body B <movable body C”. In this case, when all three movable bodies A, B, and C move to the near side of the display screen, the range of the display screen covered by the movable decorative member is maximized, and only the movable body A moves to the near side of the display screen. Then, the range of the display screen covered by the movable decorative member is minimized. Within such a minimum and maximum range, the size of the range that covers the display screen is determined by the combination of the number and size of the movable bodies that move toward the near side of the display screen among the three movable bodies A, B, and C. It becomes possible to determine variously. By linking this with the jackpot reliability and setting the operation pattern of the movable body in various ways, the movable decoration member (movable body) moves to the front side of the display screen, thereby increasing the jackpot reliability. It is possible to suggest. Thus, it is possible to further diversify the effect patterns of the movable effect, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative member is provided around the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the display screen 7a is covered by the operation. The target (game part) covered by the movable decorative member is not limited to the first embodiment. For example, the movable decorative member can be moved between the standby position and the operating position within the range of the front surface of the center decorative body 10 (center accessory) surrounding the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, a predetermined portion of the center decorative body 10 that is exposed when the movable decorative member is at the standby position is covered by the movement of the movable decorative member to the operating position, and the movable amount of the movable decorative member (movement amount) , So that the area covered can be changed in magnitude. Alternatively, a movable decorative member is provided above the front surface of the front frame 51 (above the viewing window), and the movable decorative member can be moved between a predetermined standby position and an operation position on the front side of the front frame 51. Then, predetermined portions of the front frame 51 and the viewing window that are exposed when the movable decorative member is at the standby position are covered by moving the movable decorative member to the operating position, and the amount of movement (movement) of the movable decorative member is changed. ), The area to be covered can vary in magnitude. In these configurations, too, the operation pattern of the movable decorative member is variously determined so as to indicate the jackpot reliability depending on the size of the range covered by the movable decorative member, so that the movable decorative member provided on the center decorative body or the front frame can be used. Movable character advance notice becomes possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hold announcement effect (hold change announcement) based on the result of the preliminary determination of the special figure hold is mainly based on the difference in the display color of the effect hold (white, blue, green, red, and gold in this example). However, the mode of suggesting the jackpot reliability in the reserved announcement effect (that is, the mode of the reserved announcement effect) is not limited to this. For example, characters indicating the jackpot reliability, such as “chance” or “hot fever”, may be displayed in the production hold, or other symbols or figures indicating the jackpot reliability may be displayed. In this case, for example, in the low-base state where the on-hold digestion pace is relatively slow, the indication of the jackpot reliability by staging the effect is performed by displaying characters or symbols, and in the high-base state where the on-hold digestion pace is relatively fast. As in the first embodiment, the mode of suggestion of the jackpot reliability in the production hold (execution mode of the hold announcement effect) is changed according to the game state, for example, the suggestion of the jackpot reliability is performed by the display color of the production hold. Is also good. In this way, it is possible to perform a hold announcement effect suitable for a game state, and it is possible to remarkably differentiate the hold announcement effect in each game state.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the low-priority state and the high-base state are configured so that the hold notice effect patterns (the execution manner of the hold notice effect) are partially similar (see FIG. 1 hold notice types A to C). And special figure 2 suspension notice types A to C), and tables for selecting (determining) the suspension notice effect pattern (special figure 1 suspension notice table A to C and special figure 2 suspension notice table A to C) The data structure was basically the same except for the presence or absence of the 2R jackpot (the type, number, selectivity, etc. of the selectable preliminary announcement effect patterns). On the other hand, the data structure of the hold notice table used when setting the hold notice effect pattern (S4456) differs between the low base state and the high base state, and the types of selectable (executable) hold notice effect patterns are changed. You may make it different, make the number of selectable (executable) hold notice effect patterns different, or change the selection rate of hold notice effect patterns. In this case, for example, in the low base state where the suspension digestion pace is relatively slow, the type (number) of the reservation announcement effect pattern that can be selected (executable) compared to the high base state where the suspension digestion pace is relatively fast is set. It is possible to increase the selection rate of the reserved announcement effect pattern having a high jackpot reliability. Alternatively, conversely, in the high base state, the types (numbers) of selectable (executable) pending announcement effect patterns are increased as compared with the low base state, or the big hit reliability is relatively high. It is also possible to increase the selectivity of the pending announcement effect pattern.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the change of the display mode of the production suspension in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e (second preliminary production), in the special figure 1 preliminary production presentation when the gaming state is controlled to the low base state, The display mode change of the first effect hold 9a moved from the first effect hold display area 9c to the change hold display area 9e is not executed in the change hold display area 9e, and the gaming state is controlled to the high base state. In the special figure 2 hold announcement effect when the second effect hold display area 9e moves from the second effect hold display area 9d to the variable hold display area 9e, the display mode change of the second effect hold 9b can be executed in the variable hold display area 9e. I have. In other words, the special figure 1 suspension announcement effect in the low base state is a mode (first mode) in which the display mode change (second announcement effect) of the effect suspension in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e is not executed, and the high base The special figure 2 suspension announcement effect in the state is a mode (second mode) in which the display mode change (second announcement effect) of the effect suspension in the fluctuation suspension display area 9e can be executed. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reservation announcement effect in the low base state is a mode (second mode) in which the display mode change of the effect suspension in the variable suspension display area 9e (second announcement effect) can be executed. The special figure 2 suspension announcement effect in the base state may be a mode (first mode) in which the display mode change (second announcement effect) of the effect suspension in the variable suspension display area 9e is not executed. In this way, in the low base state where the special figure hold digestion speed is slower than in the high base state, and as a result, the effect hold display period (display time) is relatively long, the effect is displayed in the variable hold display area 9e. It is possible to attract the player's interest also to the change of the display mode of the suspension (second notice effect).

  Alternatively, for both the special figure 1 reservation advance production in the low base state and the special figure 2 reservation advance production in the high base state, the display mode change of the production suspension in the variable suspension display area 9e (second preliminary production). (Second embodiment). In this case, the low-base state and the high-base state are configured so that the manner of changing the display mode of the effect hold in the variable-hold display area 9e (also referred to as “variable-hold change mode”) is different. Examples of the change hold change mode include “display color change of effect hold”, “change in shape of effect hold”, “change in size of effect hold” and the like, and “display color change of effect hold” in the low base state. For example, in the high base state, it is possible to make the change holding change mode different depending on the game state, such as “change of effect holding shape”. In addition, it is also possible to change the variation suspension change mode depending on the presence or absence of an effect related to the suspension change such as the display of the lightning image G shown in FIG. 51 (e). In this way, it is possible to differentiate between the low-priority state and the high-base state with respect to the hold announcement effect (change of hold) in the variable suspension display area 9e, and to attract the interest of the player to the hold announcement effect. It becomes possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 71 is composed of the right-handed character image 71a representing the character of "right-handed" and one right arrow image 71b located above the right-handed character image 71b. The mode of the hitting instruction image 71 is not limited to this, and it is possible to configure the image only with a right-handed character image or with only a right arrow image. In this case, the change (change) of the display mode in the above-described second and third embodiments is not erasing of a part of the image constituting the right-handing instruction notification, but the mode (size, color, shape, display, etc.) of the image being displayed. Position) can be changed (changed). In the above-described embodiment, the display position of the right-handed instruction image 71 is set to the upper right of the display screen 7a (right-handed display area 71c). However, the display position of the right-handed instruction image 71 is not limited to this. , A predetermined position on the display screen 7a. However, it is desirable to display on the display screen 7a near the outer periphery (screen peripheral side) in order to avoid hindering the effect design game effect and the big hit game effect (round effect etc.). Further, when a plurality of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are provided, the right-handed instruction image may be displayed on a display device different from the display device in which the effect symbol game effect and the big hit game effect are performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left-handed instruction image 70 is assumed to be composed of a left-handed character image 70a representing the character “Please return to left-handed” and three left arrow images 70b located above the left-handed character image 70a. However, the form of the left-handed instruction image 70 is not limited to this, and various forms can be adopted similarly to the right-handed instruction image 71 described above. Note that the display of the left-hitting instruction image 70 (notification of left-hitting instruction) is that the high base state (right-handed gaming state) ends and shifts to the low base state (left-handed gaming state), that is, the launch of the game ball. To change (return) from “right-handed” to “left-handed” since it is necessary to clearly and positively indicate to the player, compared to displaying the right-handed instruction image 71 (notifying right-handed instruction) It is desirable to perform the display in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize (conspicuous mode), such as by increasing the display size or shifting the display position toward the center of the screen.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display of the right-handed instruction image 71 in the right-handed display area 71c is changed from the start of the first round of the jackpot game relating to the initial hit to the end of the subsequent high base state (for execution of the jackpot game). (Excluding the accompanying end), and even if a jackpot game pertaining to the consecutive chan is performed during that time, the game continues even if the fanfare, round, and ending effects are being performed. Was to run. On the other hand, the display of the right-hitting instruction image 71 that continues from the first round of the big hit game related to the first hit is changed to the time when the fanfare effect or the ending effect is performed in the subsequent big hit game related to consecutive chan, that is, the game state. Is interrupted (temporarily erased) at the time of shifting to the special game state or at the time of shifting to the high base state after the special game, and when the fanfare effect or the ending effect is completed, the display of the right-hand instruction image 71 is displayed at the same display position. May be restarted. Even if the display of the right-handing instruction image 71 is temporarily interrupted in this way, it is extremely unlikely that the right-handing instruction notification during the consecutive Chang period will be difficult for the player to recognize (there is no possibility). It is possible to achieve the same effect as the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine having one big winning device (big winning opening) that operates in a big hit game (special game state) is described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine having a plurality (for example, two) of award winning devices (award winning ports).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball entry, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read, and the read acquired random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Preliminary determination) is to be performed (“Starting ball entry processing (S205)”; see FIGS. 11 and 13), but the method of the preliminary determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information to be subjected to a preliminary determination (that is, acquisition information acquired based on a starting ball) is provided by the main control unit and the sub control unit. May be provided in the RAM of the unit, and the acquired information stored in the storage area (the storage unit for the preliminary determination) may be determined (prior determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to delete the acquired information used in the preliminary determination (the acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit, it is also possible to make a preliminary decision on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball entry. That is, a determination may be made in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure suspension storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reserved storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the preliminary decision. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control processing for performing the second special figure reservation in preference to the first special figure reservation, that is, the control processing for so-called special figure 2 preferential digestion, is not limited thereto. The control process may be a control process in which the reservation is digested prior to the second special figure reservation, that is, a control process of so-called special figure 1 priority digestion. Also, priorities are not set for the digestion of the first special figure reservation and the digestion of the second special figure reservation, and the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of digestion in the order of entry (storage order) may be used. In addition, the control processing that can execute the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation can be executed in parallel.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case in which the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko game machine that determines whether or not to activate the probability variation function based on the type of the big hit symbol has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special winning area (V attacker) is provided with a specific area (V area) as a positive change operation port, and a probability variation function is performed based on whether or not a game ball has passed a specific area (V passing) during a big hit game. The present invention can also be applied to a type of pachinko gaming machine (so-called “V sure machine”) that determines whether or not to operate. Alternatively, a special winning area that can enter the ball when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is provided with a specific area (V area), and when a small hit game is played, the game ball that has entered the big winning port is The present invention can also be applied to a type 1 and type 2 pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit occurs when passing through a specific area (V passing), and a big hit game is executed based on the V passing.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the large hit probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Is also good. Furthermore, a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), and the like. A plurality of types of probability conditions defining a relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when, for example, a game machine is powered on. Is also good.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can execute a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, in order to increase the player's expectation of the continuous occurrence of special games (so-called “repeated chan”), an effect started with the execution of the special game is performed by changing the identification information after the end of the special game. There is one configured to continue as an effect accompanying display (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-29587).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, since the same effect is continuously executed from the start of the special game to the game in which the identification information is changed and displayed after the special game, the effect becomes monotonous. There is a possibility that people may become tired easily. The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to enhance the effect of the effect after the special game and to enhance the game entertainment.

A gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows.
A gaming machine which is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
With the effect mode control means which can be controlled to any of a plurality of effect modes with different effect contents,
The plurality of effect modes include at least a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect mode,
The effect mode control means can set the effect mode in the first effect mode for a predetermined period from the end of the special game, and changes the effect mode from the first effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period. The mode can be switched to a second effect mode or the third effect mode.

  Such a gaming machine includes effect mode control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of effect modes having different effect contents, and the plurality of effect modes include at least a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect. Mode exists. And the production mode control means can set the production mode in the predetermined period from the end of the special game to the first production mode, and after the predetermined period elapses, changes the production mode from the first production mode to the second production mode. Mode or the third effect mode. Therefore, after the special game, the effect mode changes before and after the predetermined period elapses, and the effect content changes accordingly. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game. The “predetermined period” after the special game can be a predetermined period or a period selected from a plurality of predetermined periods.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The effect mode control means may switch the effect mode from the second effect mode to the third effect mode after switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is characterized by the following.

  In such a gaming machine, the effect mode control means switches the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a lapse of a predetermined period after the special game, and then switches the effect mode from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. There are cases where the mode is switched. Therefore, if the effect mode is switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game, there is a possibility that the effect mode will be further switched to the third effect mode. Thereby, it is possible to further attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
Game state control means that can control the game state after the special game,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The effect mode control means,
When the game state after the special game is the first game state, the effect mode cannot be switched to the third effect mode,
When the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode or the third effect mode after the lapse of the predetermined period, and At a predetermined time after switching to the second effect mode, the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode.

  Such a gaming machine includes game state control means capable of controlling a game state after the special game, and the game state after the special game includes at least a first game state and a game state more than the first game state. There is a second game state that is advantageous to the player. When the game state after the special game is the first game state, it is impossible to switch the effect mode to the third effect mode, and the game state after the special game is the second game state. In this case, it is possible to switch the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode or the third effect mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and to switch the effect mode after switching to the second effect mode. At a predetermined time, the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. For this reason, the first effect mode in the predetermined period after the special game is an effect mode in which the game state after the special game is not the first game state or the second game state (it is unknown), The second effect mode is an effect mode indicating that the game state after the special game is the first game state, and the third effect mode is an effect mode indicating that the game state after the special game is the second game state. Become. In addition, the second effect mode can be executed even when the game state after the special game is the second game state, and therefore, the predetermined time after switching (transition) from the first effect mode to the second effect mode Until (the time of switching to the third effect mode) has passed, it can be said that the effect mode is an effect mode that internally indicates the possibility of the second game state. As a result, it is possible to further attract the player's interest to the effect contents (switching of the effect mode) after the special game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition up to a predetermined upper limit number,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means is configured so that, after the special game, the gaming state is the second gaming state, and at the elapse of the predetermined period, at least a predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information is stored in order from the earliest stored one. When the predetermined time period has passed, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, and after the switch, identification information based on the predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information can be obtained. By the end of the variable display, the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of pieces of information obtained when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The variable display of the identification information is performed based on the obtained information, and the obtained information includes at least the specific obtained information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the display result of the variable display is specified. Non-specific acquisition information that is not a display result exists. Then, the game state after the special game is the second game state, and at the elapse of a predetermined period after the special game, at least a predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information is stored in order from the first stored one. In this case, it is possible to switch the production mode from the first production mode to the second production mode after the lapse of the predetermined period, and after the switching to the second production mode, the above-mentioned predetermined number of non-specific acquisitions are performed. The effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode by the time the change display of the identification information based on the information ends. For this reason, when the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state, and the effect mode is switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after a predetermined period after the special game, the third effect mode thereafter Since the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result before switching to the special game, the switching to the third effect mode (transition) can be executed without fail. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the game state after the special game is the first game state and that the effect is actually provided by indicating later that the game state is the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 or Reference Invention 1-4 described above.
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means, when the game state after the special game is the second game state, and at least the specific acquisition information is stored at the elapse of the predetermined period, the effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period Can be switched from the first effect mode to the third effect mode.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to store acquired information acquired when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The variable display of the identification information is performed based on the obtained information, and the obtained information includes at least the specific obtained information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the display result of the variable display is specified. Non-specific acquisition information that is not a display result exists. Then, when the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state and at least the specific acquisition information is stored at the elapse of the predetermined period after the special game, the effect mode is changed to the second at the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to switch from the first production mode to the third production mode. Therefore, by switching (shifting) from the first effect mode to the third effect mode, the player is made aware that the game state after the special game is the second game state, and then the identification based on the specific acquisition information. It is possible to display the information in a fluctuating manner and to execute a special game. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect of switching the effect mode after the special game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
It is possible to perform a notice effect on the fluctuation display of identification information,
In the first effect mode, the possibility of executing the notice effect is lower than in the second effect mode and the third effect mode.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a notice effect related to the change display of the identification information. In the first effect mode, the notice effect is performed in comparison with the second effect mode and the third effect mode. The likelihood is low. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate between the first effect mode until the predetermined period elapses after the special game and the second effect mode or the third effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. As a result, it is possible to make the effects after the special game rich. In addition, "the possibility of execution of the notice effect is low" includes the case where the possibility of execution is zero.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 1, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect after the special game, and to improve the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification information and executing a special game advantageous to a player when a display result of the variable display is a specific display result. In this type of gaming machine, an effect such as a reach and a notice is performed in accordance with the display of the change of the identification information, so that the gaming entertainment is improved (see, for example, JP-A-2009-95470).

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, although the production contents (for example, motifs and characters appearing) are different depending on the model, the production method (for example, development and pattern of the production) does not change so much. There was a problem that people were easily bored. The present invention 2 has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player and to improve the entertainment interest of the game. It is in.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information,
A game state control means capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The predetermined effect includes at least a first effect and a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect include similar effect contents,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the first effect when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state, and is configured to execute the first effect when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state. It is characterized in that two effects can be performed.

  In such a gaming machine, at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided as a gaming state when the identification information is fluctuated, and as an effect executable with the fluctuating display of the identification information, It has at least a first effect and a second effect, and the first effect and the second effect include the same effect contents. When the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state, the first effect can be executed. When the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state, the second effect is executed. It is possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect including the same effect contents in the first game state and the second game state, and to make the effect function different depending on the game state. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect performed in each game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The second gaming state is a high-frequency state in which the frequency of execution of the change display of the identification information is higher than in the first gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, the second gaming state is a high-frequency state in which the frequency of performing the display of the change of the identification information is higher than that of the first gaming state. For this reason, the effect including the same effect content can be executed in the first game state and the second game state (high-frequency state), and the function of the effect depends on whether or not the effect is in the high-frequency state. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect performed in each game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is:
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information,
Effect mode control means capable of controlling the effect mode when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The production mode includes at least a first production mode and a second production mode,
The predetermined effect includes at least a first effect and a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect include similar effect contents,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the first effect when the effect mode is controlled to the first effect mode, and the second effect when the effect mode is controlled to the second effect mode. It is characterized in that two effects can be performed.

  In such a gaming machine, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes when the change display of the identification information is performed, and as an effect that can be executed with the change display of the identification information, It has at least a first effect and a second effect, and the first effect and the second effect include the same effect contents. When the effect mode is controlled to the first effect mode, the first effect can be executed. When the effect mode is controlled to the second effect mode, the second effect is executed. It is possible to do. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect including the same effect content in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and to make the effect function different depending on the effect mode. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effects performed in each of the effect modes, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
In a case where the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, a ratio at which the effect performing means executes the first effect and a ratio at which the second effect is executed are different. It is.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, and to perform the display of the variable display of the identification information. The execution ratio (executability) of the first effect and the execution ratio (executability) of the second effect when the display result is the specific display result are different. For this reason, even if an effect (the first effect or the second effect) including the same effect contents is executed for the player, the degree of expectation of the effect (the execution of the special game) depends on the game state or the effect mode at that time. Is different). This makes it possible to increase the interest of the player in the effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the first effect and the second effect as an effect indicating information relating to a variable display of the identification information,
The first effect and the second effect differ in the content of the information to be suggested.

  In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5, it is possible to execute the first effect and the second effect as an effect suggesting information relating to the variable display of the identification information, and the first effect and the second effect are different. , The content of the information to suggest is different. For this reason, even if an effect (a first effect or a second effect) including the same effect content is executed for the player, the content of the suggestion differs depending on the game state or the effect mode at that time. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the player in the effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 2, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been widely known a gaming machine capable of performing a special game that is advantageous for a player based on the display of a change in identification information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and the display result of the change display being a specific display result. Has been. Some types of gaming machines include an effect (also referred to as a "movable effect") for operating a movable body (movable role) for effect. The movable body for the effect is often provided around the display screen for the effect display located substantially in the center of the game area, and as one of the effect operations in this case, the movable body appears on the near side of the display screen. (See, for example, JP-A-2005-34316).

  However, a movable effect in which a movable body (movable character) appears on the near side of a display screen has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and it is becoming difficult to obtain the effect of the movable effect. There was a problem. The present invention 3 has been made in view of such circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to enhance the effect of a movable effect and to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result, capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
Gaming parts that are visible to the player,
Effect performing means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable effect means and positioning the game element at a position in front of the game component.
By performing the movable effect, the larger the range of the game component covered by the movable effect means located on the front side of the game component, the greater the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific display result. It is characterized by being expensive.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result. In addition, by operating a predetermined movable effect means, it is possible to execute a movable effect in which the movable effect means is positioned in front of a game component that can be visually recognized by a player. When the movable effect is executed, the movable effect means is located in front of the game component. At this time, as the range of the game component covered by the movable effect means is larger, the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is specified. There is a high possibility that a display result will be obtained. For this reason, depending on the size of the range of the game component covered by the movable effect means with the execution of the movable effect, the display result of the variable display of the identification information indicates the expectation degree (expected degree for the execution of the special game). It is possible to do. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable effect, to attract the player's interest to the movable effect, and to further enhance the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
In the movable effect, at least a first movable effect that operates the first movable effect means and is positioned on the near side of the game component, and a second movable effect means that operates and is positioned on the front side of the game component. There is a second movable production,
By executing the first movable effect, the second movable effect is executed before the game component compared to the range of the game component covered by the first movable effect means located on the front side of the game component. The range of the game component covered by the second movable effect means located on the side is larger.

  In such a gaming machine, as a movable effect, at least a first movable effect that operates the first movable effect means and is positioned in front of the game component, and a second movable effect means that operates the front side of the game component. And a second movable effect that is positioned at Then, the execution of the second movable effect is compared with the range of the game component covered by the first movable effect means when the first movable effect means is located in front of the game component by the execution of the first movable effect. The range of the game component covered by the second movable effect device when the movable effect device is located on the front side of the game component is larger (wider). For this reason, it is possible to make the second movable effect a movable effect that has a higher degree of expectation than the first movable effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the movable effect easy to understand for the player.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
The effect performing means, when executing the movable effect from the start of the change display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, at least execute the first movable effect and execute the second movable effect. The movable effect is executed in a mode in which the second movable effect is not executed, in a mode in which the second movable effect is executed after the first movable effect is executed, or in a mode in which the second movable effect is executed without executing the first movable effect. It is characterized in that it is possible.

  In such a gaming machine, when a movable effect is performed after the display of the identification information is changed and the display result is derived and displayed, at least the first movable effect is performed and the second movable effect is not performed. In the aspect, the second movable effect can be executed after the first movable effect is executed, or the second movable effect can be executed without executing the first movable effect. . For this reason, at the time of performing the movable effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the at least three modes is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the movable effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 or Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
In the first movable effect, the first movable effect means is operable based on a predetermined first operation pattern,
In the second movable effect, the second movable effect means is operable based on a predetermined second operation pattern.

  In such a gaming machine, in the first movable effect, the first movable effect means can operate based on a predetermined first operation pattern, and in the second movable effect, the second movable effect means It is possible to operate based on a predetermined second operation pattern. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the operation pattern of the first movable effect means in the first movable effect and the operation pattern of the second movable effect means in the second movable effect is increased, and the diversification of the operation pattern is facilitated. Thus, it is possible to easily enhance the effect of the first movable effect and the second movable effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-2 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
The second movable production means is configured to include a plurality of movable members,
When the second movable effect is not performed, the plurality of movable members are located at predetermined standby positions and are separated from each other,
When the second movable effect is executed, the plurality of movable members move to the front side of the game component and become in a state of being close to each other.

  In such a gaming machine, the second movable effect means is configured to include a plurality of movable members, and when the second movable effect is not being executed, the plurality of movable members are respectively located at predetermined standby positions. When the second movable effect is performed, the plurality of movable members are configured to move toward the game component and to approach the game component, respectively. For this reason, the operation of the second movable effect means in the second movable effect is such that the plurality of movable members respectively move from the standby position to the near side (operating position) of the game component and become close to the near side. This is achieved by: Then, the game component is covered by the plurality of movable members (second movable effect means) that have come close to each other. Thereby, it is possible to make the second movable effect an effect with an impact.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
An image display device capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided,
The image display device is arranged with its display screen facing the front side,
The game component is the image display device.

  In such a gaming machine, an image display device capable of displaying a predetermined image is arranged with its display screen facing forward, and this image display device is covered by movable effect means in accordance with the execution of the movable effect. (That is, game parts). For this reason, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the execution of the special game by the size of the range of the image display device (display screen) covered by the movable effect means with the execution of the movable effect. Thereby, it becomes easy to attract the interest of the player who is playing the game paying attention to the image display device (display screen) to the movable effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 3, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable effect and to improve the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a variation display of identification information (for example, a special symbol, a production symbol, or the like) is performed, and a special game advantageous to a player can be executed based on a display result of a variation display of identification information being a specific display result. Game machines are widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for enhancing the expectation of the player are performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, thereby improving the gaming interest. As such an effect, information on the variable display of the identification information currently being executed or information on the variable display of the identification information that is determined to be executed later (for example, the possibility that the display result becomes a specific display result (reliability) or A notice effect that gives notice of an effect state until the display result is derived, etc.) is known (see, for example, JP-A-2003-164617 and JP-A-2009-95470).

  However, the above-described notice effect has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the form of the notice effect is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 4 has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a notice effect that can attract the interest of the player and to improve the interest in the game. It is in.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem includes:
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information, and is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect on a variable display of identification information,
Game state control means capable of controlling a game state capable of performing a variable display of identification information,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The mode of the notice effect may be different when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a notice effect regarding the variable display of the identification information, and at least the first game state and the second game state are set as the game states in which the variable display of the identification information can be performed. It is possible to control to the state. Then, when the game state is controlled to the first game state and when the game state is controlled to the second game state, the mode of the notice effect may be different. For this reason, it is possible to differentiate the notice effect between the first game state and the second game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the notice effect in each game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-1 described above.
The change display of the identification information is executed based on the obtained information obtained when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired by establishment of a predetermined condition,
The notice effect includes at least a first notice effect that suggests the change display before performing the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage unit,
The mode of the notice effect is at least a mode relating to the first notice effect.

  In such a gaming machine, the variable display of the identification information is executed based on the acquired information acquired when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the acquired information can store the acquired acquired information. It has storage means. And, as a notice effect, at least a first notice effect that suggests the change display before executing the change display of the identification information based on the acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means is provided, and the first game state In the case where the mode of the notice effect is different between and the second game state, this is the mode relating to at least the first notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the first announcement effect between the first game state and the second game state. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the first announcement effect in each game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2 described above.
A storage display unit capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the obtained information is stored in the obtained information storage unit,
The first notice effect is to change the storage display to a specific storage display different from normal,
In the aspect relating to the first notice effect, at least there is a display mode of the specific storage display when the storage display is changed to the specific storage display,
The display mode is different when the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state and when the gaming state is controlled to the second gaming state.

  Such a gaming machine includes a storage display unit capable of displaying a storage display indicating that the obtained information is stored in the obtained information storage unit, and the first announcement effect changes the storage display to a specific storage display different from a normal display. It is something that changes. And the aspect regarding the first notice effect includes at least a display mode of the specific storage display when the storage display is changed to the specific storage display, and when the game state is controlled to the first game state and when the game state is controlled to the second storage state. The display mode of the specific storage display is different between when the game state is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the display mode of the storage display (specific storage display) related to the first announcement effect between the first game state and the second game state. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the first announcement effect in each game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-3 described above,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the identification information,
The notice effect includes at least a second notice effect using the corresponding display,
The mode of the notice effect is at least a mode relating to the second notice effect.

  Such a gaming machine includes a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the identification information, and has at least a second preliminary effect using the corresponding display as the preliminary display effect. In the case where the mode of the notice effect is different between the first game state and the second game state, the mode is at least the mode relating to the second notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the second announcement effect between the first game state and the second game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the second announcement effect in each game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-4 described above,
There are at least a first mode in which the second preview effect is not executed and a second mode in which the second preview effect is executed,
The one of a notice effect when the game state is controlled to the first game state and a notice effect when the game state is controlled to the second game state, It is characterized in that one aspect is included and the second aspect is included in the other.

  Such a gaming machine has at least a first mode in which the second advance effect is not executed and a second mode in which the second advance effect is executed as modes relating to the second advance effect. The first mode is included in one of the mode of the notice effect when the game state is controlled to the first game state and the state of the notice effect when the game state is controlled to the second game state. The second mode is included. Therefore, it is possible to set one of the first game state and the second game state to a game state in which the second announcement effect can be executed, and to set the other to a game state in which the second announcement effect is not executed. This makes it possible to differentiate the notice effect by the presence or absence of the second notice effect in each game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-5 described above,
The second game state is a high-frequency state in which the frequency of executing the display of the change of the identification information is higher than that of the first game state.

  In such a gaming machine, the second gaming state is a high-frequency state in which the frequency of performing the display of the change of the identification information is higher than that of the first gaming state. For this reason, in the second game state (high-frequency state), the frequency of executing the variable display of the identification information is higher than in the first game state, so that the opportunity to execute the notice effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the second gaming state (high-frequency state).

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 4, it is possible to realize a notice effect that can attract the interest of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Conventionally, a center role (central role) including a liquid crystal display device or the like is provided substantially at the center of the game area, and in a normal game state, a game ball is fired toward a game area on the left side of the center role (a so-called “left side”). Hitting), and in a gaming state in which a game such as a jackpot game or a probable change game is performed which is advantageous to the player, a game ball is fired toward a game area on the right side of the center role (a so-called “right hit”). Gaming machines are known. In this type of gaming machine, when executing a big hit game or a probable change game, it is general to issue an instruction to prompt the player to make a right-handed hit (see, for example, JP-A-2008-12185).

  In gaming machines in recent years, there is a tendency that the fancy of the effects performed during the game increases in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. For this reason, the right-handed instruction notification performed during the game may be lost in the effect, and may be difficult for the player to recognize. The present invention 5 has been made in view of such circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a launch instruction notification that is easy for a player to recognize.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem includes:
A game machine that fires a game ball toward a game area to play a game,
Game state control means capable of controlling the game state,
Instruction notification execution means capable of executing an instruction notification for instructing which of the game areas to fire a game ball,
The game state includes at least a predetermined game state in which a game ball is fired toward a predetermined area of the game area to play a game,
The predetermined game state includes at least a first predetermined game state and a second predetermined game state,
In the instruction notification, there is a predetermined instruction notification that instructs to launch a game ball toward the predetermined area,
The instruction notification executing means is capable of executing the predetermined instruction notification in a similar manner in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state.

  Such a gaming machine includes at least a first predetermined gaming state and a second predetermined gaming state as a predetermined gaming state in which a game ball is fired toward a predetermined area of the gaming area to play a game. ing. In addition, it is possible to execute a predetermined instruction notification for instructing to fire a game ball toward a predetermined area in the game area in a similar manner in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. Has become. With this, for the player, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in a similar manner, so that the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state are different. In any of the two predetermined game states, the predetermined instruction notification can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 described above.
The game state control means can control a game state from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state,
The instruction notification execution means executes the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined game state in a predetermined mode, and maintains the game state even after the game state shifts from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state. The notification of the predetermined instruction in a first predetermined game state is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification is performed in a predetermined manner in the first predetermined gaming state, and when the gaming state has transitioned from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, after the transition, Also in the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined game state before the transition is executed. Accordingly, even if the game state shifts from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in a similar manner before and after the transition, so that the predetermined instruction The notification can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-2 described above.
The instruction notification execution means can change a mode of the predetermined instruction notification after the game state has shifted from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state to a predetermined time in the second predetermined game state. It is characterized by the following.

  In such a gaming machine, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification when executing the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined game state even after the gaming state has shifted from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state, 2 It is possible to change to a predetermined time during the predetermined game state. Thus, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification can be changed after the transition from the first predetermined game state to the second predetermined game state, so that the player can pay attention to the predetermined instruction notification.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3 described above,
The game state control means can control a game state from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state,
The instruction notification executing means executes the predetermined instruction notification in a predetermined mode in the second predetermined game state, and executes the predetermined instruction notification even after the game state shifts from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state. Executing the predetermined instruction notification in a second predetermined game state.

  In such a gaming machine, the predetermined instruction notification is performed in a predetermined mode in the second predetermined gaming state, and when the gaming state has transitioned from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, after the transition, Also in the first predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification in the first predetermined game state before the transition is executed. Accordingly, even if the game state shifts from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction notification is executed in a similar manner before and after the shift, so that the predetermined instruction is given to the player. The notification can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-4 described above.
The instruction notification execution means can change a mode of the predetermined instruction notification after the game state has shifted from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state to a predetermined time in the first predetermined game state. It is characterized by the following.

  In such a gaming machine, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification when executing the predetermined instruction notification in the second predetermined game state even after the gaming state has shifted from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state, It is possible to change to a predetermined time during one predetermined game state. Accordingly, the mode of the predetermined instruction notification can be changed after the transition from the second predetermined game state to the first predetermined game state, so that the player can pay attention to the predetermined instruction notification.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-5 described above,
The instruction notification executing means can execute the predetermined instruction notification by displaying a predetermined instruction image instructing to launch a game ball toward the predetermined area on predetermined display means,
The same predetermined instruction image can be displayed on the display means in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state.

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined instruction notification by displaying a predetermined instruction image on a predetermined display means. The same predetermined instruction image can be displayed in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. Thereby, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction image is the same, so that the player can easily recognize the display of the predetermined instruction image (notification of the predetermined instruction). It will be.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-6 described above.
The instruction notification executing means is capable of displaying the same predetermined instruction image on the same display unit of the display means in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. is there.

  In such a gaming machine, the same predetermined instruction image can be displayed on the same display unit of the display means in the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. As a result, for the player, although the game state is different between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, the predetermined instruction image and its display position are the same, so that the display of the predetermined instruction image (the predetermined instruction notification) ) Can be easily recognized.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 5, it is possible to execute the notification of the launch instruction that is easy for the player to recognize.

  1 Pachinko machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 4 rail member, 5 board ramp, 6 ball return prevention piece, 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 8 staging pattern, 9a first staging, 9b second staging Reservation, 9c First production suspension display area (first production suspension display area), 9d Second production suspension display area (second production suspension display area), 9e Variable suspension display area, 13 first movable decorative member, 14 second Movable decorative member, 14a, 14b, 14c Movable body, 20 1st starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 28 gates, 30 big winning opening, 31 big winning device, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display) Part), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display part), 70 left-stroke instruction image, 70a left-stroke character image, 70b left-arrow image, 70c left-strike display area (left-strike instruction image display part) 71 right-stroke instruction image, 71a right-stroke character image, 71b right-arrow image, 71c right-strike display area (right-strike instruction image display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub-control Substrate (sub-control unit), 91 effect control microcomputer, 100 image control substrate (image control unit), 101 image control microcomputer.

Claims (6)

A gaming machine which is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
With the effect mode control means which can be controlled to any of a plurality of effect modes with different effect contents,
The plurality of effect modes include at least a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect mode,
The effect mode control means can set the effect mode in the first effect mode for a predetermined period from the end of the special game, and changes the effect mode from the first effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period. A gaming machine capable of switching to a second effect mode or the third effect mode. The effect mode control means may switch the effect mode from the second effect mode to the third effect mode after switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode after the elapse of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: Game state control means that can control the game state after the special game,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The effect mode control means,
When the game state after the special game is the first game state, the effect mode cannot be switched to the third effect mode,
When the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode or the third effect mode after the lapse of the predetermined period, and The effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode at a predetermined time after the switch to the second effect mode. 3. The method according to claim 1, wherein the second effect mode is switched to the third effect mode. Gaming machine. An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition up to a predetermined upper limit number,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means is configured so that, after the special game, the gaming state is the second gaming state, and at the elapse of the predetermined period, at least a predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information is stored in order from the earliest stored one. When the predetermined time period has passed, the effect mode can be switched from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, and after the switch, identification information based on the predetermined number of non-specific acquisition information can be obtained. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the effect mode can be switched from the second effect mode to the third effect mode before the change display ends. An acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Variation display of identification information is executable based on the obtained information,
The acquisition information, at least, specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result, there is non-specific acquisition information and the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the specific display result,
The effect mode control means, when the game state after the special game is the second game state, and at least the specific acquisition information is stored at the elapse of the predetermined period, the effect mode by the elapse of the predetermined period The game machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the first effect mode can be switched to the third effect mode. It is possible to perform a notice effect on the fluctuation display of identification information,
The said 1st production mode, execution possibility of the said announcement production is low compared with the said 2nd production mode and the said 3rd production mode. The Claim 1 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

Images